<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Wgviana</id>
	<title>Joomla! Documentation - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Wgviana"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/Special:Contributions/Wgviana"/>
	<updated>2026-08-09T10:06:00Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.0</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Plugin_Manager_Edit&amp;diff=66062</id>
		<title>Help17:Extensions Plugin Manager Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Plugin_Manager_Edit&amp;diff=66062"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:06:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to the [[Help16:Extensions_Plugin_Manager|Plug-in Manager]]. Click on the Plug-in&#039;s Name or click on the Plug-in&#039;s checkbox and press the Edit button in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows you to edit the details and options for plug-ins. Some plug-ins have several configurable options, while others may not have any.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-plugin_manager-edit-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Details==&lt;br /&gt;
The Details section is the same for all plug-ins and has the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in Name.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Name of the Plug-in.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not this Plug-in is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Access.&#039;&#039;&#039; Which user &#039;access levels&#039; have access to this item. You can change an item&#039;s Access Level by clicking on its name to open it up for editing. The default user &#039;access levels&#039; which come preconfigured with Joomla! are:&lt;br /&gt;
** Public: Everyone has access including website visitors who have not logged in&lt;br /&gt;
** Registered: Only users with registered status or higher will have access&lt;br /&gt;
** Special: Only users with author status or higher have access&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering.&#039;&#039;&#039; A drop-down list of plug-ins of the same Type. The list of plug-ins is arranged by their current order. You can change this plug-in&#039;s order in relation to the other plug-ins by selecting the plug-in in the drop-down list that you want this plug-in to be ordered below.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in Type.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Type of the Plug-in. This value cannot be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in File.&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the Plug-in file. Each Plug-in has two files with this name. One has the file extension &#039;.php&#039; and the other has the file extension &#039;.xml&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;ID.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Plug-in&#039;s ID number. This is a unique identification number for this item assigned automatically by Joomla!. It is used to identify the item internally, for example in internal links. You cannot change this number.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Description.&#039;&#039;&#039; The description of what this Plug-in does. This cannot be changed. The developer of the plug-in specifies this. This may be blank if the developer did not specify a description for the plug-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Options==&lt;br /&gt;
If the plug-in has configurable options they will appear to the right of the details section. Usually you will see &#039;&#039;Basic Options&#039;&#039; which are general options which need to be configured for the basic operation of the plug-in. You may also see &#039;&#039;Advanced Options&#039;&#039; which are additional configurable options available for the plug-in which allows further customization of the plug-in. Finally you may see &#039;&#039;Language Options&#039;&#039; which are options related to the language functions of your Joomla! installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-plugin_manager-edit-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save.&#039;&#039;&#039; Save it and return to editing the plug-in details.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close.&#039;&#039;&#039; Save it and return to the previous screen. If you have been working on a screen for a long time and don&#039;t want to risk losing your work, pressing &#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039; saves your work and lets you continue working. If, for example, you lost your Internet connection, your work will be saved up to this point.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close.&#039;&#039;&#039; Return to the previous screen without saving your work. If you press &#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039; while adding a new item, this new item will not be created. If you were modifying an existing item, the modifications will not be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Help.&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens this Help Screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Plug-in Descriptions and Options==&lt;br /&gt;
When Joomla! is installed, many plug-ins are included in the installation. These are described below, along with any options for the plug-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Authentication - Joomla===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in processes the default User Authentication method in Joomla!. It has no options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Authentication - GMail===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in processes User Authentication using GMail accounts. It has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-gmail-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Apply Username Suffix.&#039;&#039;&#039; This options allows you to automatically apply a suffix to the username a person enters when they log into your Joomla! installation. The suffix is the portion of the email address after the &#039;&#039;@&#039;&#039; symbol.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Username Suffix.&#039;&#039;&#039; This is the suffix portion of the GMail email addresses which will be used to log into your site. This is the portion of the mail address after the &#039;&#039;@&#039;&#039; symbol. Usually you will set this to &#039;&#039;gmail.com&#039;&#039; for regular GMail accounts. This option is present to allow you to use other GMail accounts that don&#039;t end in the typical &#039;&#039;gmail.com&#039;&#039; suffix. This would be the case with Google Apps for Domains email accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Verify Peer.&#039;&#039;&#039; When your Joomla! installation attempts to verify the entered Gmail username it does so over an SSL connection. This option configures whether or not your Joomla! installation will check to ensure the CA certificate of the SSL connection is valid before proceeding with verification of the entered username/password. In some situations certificate verification fails in which case you can try setting this option to &#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039; to try to fix this.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;User Blacklist.&#039;&#039;&#039; A comma separated list of usernames not allowed to log into your Joomla! installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To use the GMail plug-in:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Create a Joomla! user account with the same username as a GMail account user. For example if the GMail email address of the person you want to add is bob1234@gmail.com you would create the Joomla! user account with the username &#039;&#039;bob1234&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enable the GMail Plug-in.&lt;br /&gt;
* Logout of Joomla!.&lt;br /&gt;
* Login using the GMail username (without &amp;quot;@gmail.com&amp;quot;) and the GMail password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Authentication - LDAP===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in processes User Authentication against an LDAP server. It has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-ldap-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Host.&#039;&#039;&#039; The host URL. For example, &amp;quot;openldap.mycompany.org&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Port.&#039;&#039;&#039; The port number. The default is 389.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;LDAP V3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not this host uses LDAP version 3. The default is LDAP v2.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Negotiate TLS.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to use TLS encryption with this host. If set to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;, all traffic to and from this server must be encrypted.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Follow Referrals.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether to set the LDAP_OPT_REFERRALS flag to Yes or No. For Windows 2003 hosts this must be set to No.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Authorization Method.&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Bind Directly as User&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Bind and Search&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Base DN.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Base DN of your LDAP server. &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Search String.&#039;&#039;&#039; A query string used to search for a given User. The [search] keyword is replaced by the login typed by the User. For example: &amp;quot;uid=[search]&amp;quot;. More than one Search String can be entered. Separate each by a semi-colon &amp;quot;;&amp;quot; character. This is only used when searching.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;s DN.&#039;&#039;&#039; The [username] keyword is dynamically replaced by the username typed by the User. An example string is: &amp;quot;uid=[username], dc=[my-domain], dc=[com]&amp;quot;. More than one string can be entered. Separate each with a semi-colon &amp;quot;;&amp;quot; character. This is only used if the Authorization Method above is set to &amp;quot;Bind Directly as User&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Connect Username and Connect Password.&#039;&#039;&#039; These define connection parameters for the DN lookup phase. For anonymous lookup, leave both of these fields blank. For an Administrative Connection, the &amp;quot;Connect Username&amp;quot; is the username of an administrative account (for example, &amp;quot;Administrator&amp;quot;). In this case, the &amp;quot;Connect password&amp;quot; is the actual password to this administrative account.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Map: Full Name.&#039;&#039;&#039; The LDAP attribute that contains the User&#039;s full name.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Map: E-mail.&#039;&#039;&#039; The LDAP attribute that contains the User&#039;s e-mail address.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Map: User ID.&#039;&#039;&#039; The LDAP attribute that contains the User&#039;s login ID. For Active Directory, this is &amp;quot;sAMAccountName&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Authentication - OpenID===&lt;br /&gt;
This Plugin processes user authentication with an OpenID. It has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-openid-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Convert Old Usernames.&#039;&#039;&#039; Convert old usernames to the proper OpenID format. Set this to &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039; if you upgraded your Joomla! installation from one that was already using OpenID authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Require Policy phishing-resistant.&#039;&#039;&#039; Requires the OpenID Provider to be configured with the OpenID Provider Authentication Policy Extension &#039;&#039;Phishing-Resistant Authentication&#039;&#039; policy.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Require Policy multi-factor.&#039;&#039;&#039; Requires the OpenID Provider to be configured with the OpenID Provider Authentication Policy Extension &#039;&#039;Multi-Factor Authentication&#039;&#039; policy.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Require Policy multi-factor-physical.&#039;&#039;&#039; Requires the OpenID Provider to be configured with the OpenID Provider Authentication Policy Extension &#039;&#039;Physical Multi-Factor Authentication&#039;&#039; policy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Content - Email Cloaking===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in cloaks all e-mails in content from spambots using JavaScript. This helps prevent e-mails contained in articles from being added to spam e-mail lists. You can disable Email Cloaking inside an article by inserting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{emailcloak=off}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; anywhere in the text of the article. In this case, no e-mail addresses in the article will be cloaked by this plug-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email Cloaking has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-email_cloaking-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Mode.&#039;&#039;&#039; How the e-mails will be displayed. Options are &amp;quot;As linkable mailto address&amp;quot; or as &amp;quot;Non-linkable text&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Content - Code Highlighter (GeSHi)===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in displays formatted code in Articles based on the GeSHi highlighting engine. It has no options.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Syntax usage :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lt;pre xml:lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
echo $test;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lt;/pre&amp;amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Content - Load Modules===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in allows you to place a Module inside an Article with the syntax: {loadposition xx}, where &amp;quot;xx&amp;quot; is a user-defined position code. For example, if you create a Module with the Position value of &amp;quot;myposition1&amp;quot;, then typing the text &amp;quot;{loadposition myposition1}&amp;quot; inside an Article will cause that Module to show at that point in the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in has the following option:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-load_modules-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Style.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Style for the loaded Module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Content - Pagebreak===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in adds table of contents functionality to a paginated Article. This is done automatically through the use of the Pagebreak button added to the lower part of the text panel in an Article. The HTML code is included here as a reference of what is available. The Pagebreak will itself display in the text window as a simple horizontal line.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 Syntax: Usage: &amp;lt;hr class=&amp;quot;system-pagebreak&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;hr class=&amp;quot;system-pagebreak&amp;quot; title=&amp;quot;The page title&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; or &lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;hr class=&amp;quot;system-pagebreak&amp;quot; alt=&amp;quot;The first page&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; or &lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;hr class=&amp;quot;system-pagebreak&amp;quot; title=&amp;quot;The page title&amp;quot; alt=&amp;quot;The first page&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; or &lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;hr class=&amp;quot;system-pagebreak&amp;quot; alt=&amp;quot;The first page&amp;quot; title=&amp;quot;The page title&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-pagebreak-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Site Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not the title and heading attributes from the plug-in will be added to the Site Title tag.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Table of Contents.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether to Hide or Show a table of contents for multi-page Articles.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show all.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to give Users the option to show all pages of an Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Content - Page Navigation===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in allows you to add Next &amp;amp; Previous navigation links  to Articles, for example when using a blog or list layout. This feature can be controlled with the following Joomla! parameters: &lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Show Navigation&amp;quot; in the [[Help16:Content_Article_Manager#Global_Configuration|Article Manager - Global Configuration]] screen&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Show Navigation&amp;quot; in the Parameters - Component section of the [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Item_Manager_Edit#Parameters_-_Component_for_Articles|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit - Parameters - Component for Articles]] screen for Article layouts. &lt;br /&gt;
Note that, if the Page Navigation plug-in is disabled in this screen, no Page Navigation will show and the parameter settings above will have no effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in has the following option:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-page_navigation-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Position.&#039;&#039;&#039; Position of the navigation link. Options are &amp;quot;Above&amp;quot; the Article or &amp;quot;Below&amp;quot; the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Content - Vote===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in adds the Voting functionality to Articles. It has no options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Editor - CodeMirror===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in loads the CodeMirror editor. CodeMirror is a code editor which provides an editor more suited for source code. It provides code syntax highlighting for many programming languages. It can show you mismatched tags and also helps you maintain consistent indenting of your code. It has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-codemirror-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;List numbers.&#039;&#039;&#039; Display line numbers in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Tab mode.&#039;&#039;&#039; Causes tab to adjust the indentation of the selection or current line using the current parser&#039;s rules&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Editor - None===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in loads a basic text editor. This option can be used when you are pasting HTML code from another source and you don&#039;t want the HTML to be altered by a WYSIWYG editor. This plug-in has no options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Editor - TinyMCE===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in loads the TinyMCE editor. This is the default editor in Joomla!.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Plugin.Tinymce_Output.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-tinymce-basic-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Functionality.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select &amp;quot;Advanced&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Simple&amp;quot; functionality. With &amp;quot;Simple&amp;quot; selected, the User has only 9 toolbar buttons: Bold, Italic, Underline, Strikethrough, Undo, Re-do, Clean up messy code, Bullets, and Numbering. With &amp;quot;Advanced&amp;quot; selected, the User has all of the TinyMCE toolbar buttons. &amp;quot;Advanced&amp;quot; is the default setting.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Skin.&#039;&#039;&#039; Choose the skin which will be applied to the TinyMCE editor when displayed in your website.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Compressed version.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to use the compressed version of TinyMCE. Note that this does not work reliably with Windows IE, so &amp;quot;Off&amp;quot; is the recommended setting and is the default.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Clean code on load.&#039;&#039; Whether or not to automatically clean up the HTML code when the editor first loads. Default value is &amp;quot;Off&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Clean code on save.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether to run HTML code cleanup when a file is saved. Options are &amp;quot;Never&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Front Only&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;Always&amp;quot;. The default setting is &amp;quot;Always&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Entity Encoding.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Automatic Language Selection.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to match the selected UI language. Do not set to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; unless the appropriate editor languages are installed. Default is &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Language Code.&#039;&#039;&#039; Editor UI language code. This must be entered if Automatic Language Selection is &amp;quot;Off&amp;quot;. Default is &amp;quot;en&amp;quot; for British English.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Text Direction.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether the language reads &amp;quot;Left to Right&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Right to Left&amp;quot; (for example, like Arabic). Default is &amp;quot;Left to Right&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Template CSS classes.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to load the &amp;quot;editor.css&amp;quot; file. If no such file is found for the default template, the &amp;quot;editor.css&amp;quot; file from the system template is used. Default is &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Custom CSS Classes.&#039;&#039;&#039; Optional full URL path to a custom CSS file. If entered, this overrides the Template CSS classes setting.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;URLs.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether to use Relative or Absolute URLs for links. The default is &amp;quot;Relative&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;New Lines.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether to interpret new lines as &amp;quot;P Elements&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;BR Elements&amp;quot;. Default is &amp;quot;P Elements&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Prohibited Elements.&#039;&#039;&#039; The elements that will be cleaned from the text. Default is &amp;quot;applet&amp;quot;, which will remove applet elements from the text.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Valid Elements.&#039;&#039;&#039; Optional list of valid HTML elements to add to the existing rule set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in has the following advanced options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-tinymce-advanced-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether to show the toolbar above or below the editor window.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar align.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;HTML Height.&#039;&#039;&#039; The height, in pixels, of the HTML mode pop-up window.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;HTML Width.&#039;&#039;&#039; The width, in pixels, of the HTML mode pop-up window.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Element Path.&#039;&#039;&#039; If set to &amp;quot;On&amp;quot;, show the &#039;Set Classes&#039; button for the marked text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following options only apply if the editor is in Extended Mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Fonts.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the &#039;Font&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Paste.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the &#039;Paste&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Search-Replace.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the &#039;Search and Replace&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Insert Date.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the &#039;Insert Date&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Date Format.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Date format to use for Insert Date.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Insert Time.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the &#039;Insert Time&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Time Format.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Time format to use for Insert Time.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Colors.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the &#039;Colors&#039; control buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Table.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Table buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Smilies.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the &#039;Smilies&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Media.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the &#039;Media&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Horizontal Rule.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the &#039;Horizontal Rule&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Directionality.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the &#039;Directionality&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Fullscreen.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the &#039;Fullscreen&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Style.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the &#039;CSS Style&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Layer buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;XHTMLxtras.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the additional XHTML features.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Visualchars.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show invisible characters, specifically non-breaking spaces.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Nonbreaking.&#039;&#039;&#039; Insert non-breaking space entities.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Template.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the &#039;Template&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Blockquote.&#039;&#039;&#039; Turn on/off block quotes.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordcount.&#039;&#039;&#039; Turn on/off word count.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced image.&#039;&#039;&#039; Turn on/off a more advanced image dialog box.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced link.&#039;&#039;&#039; Turn on/off a more advanced link dialog box.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced List.&#039;&#039;&#039; Turn on/off the ability to set number formats and bullet types in ordered and unordered lists.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Save Warning.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to give a warning if the User cancels without saving the file. The default value is &amp;quot;Off&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Context menu.&#039;&#039;&#039; Turn on/off the context menu.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Inline popups.&#039;&#039;&#039; Turn on/off dialogs opening as floating DIV layers instead of popup windows. This option is useful to allow getting around popup blockers.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Custom plugin.&#039;&#039;&#039; Add custom TinyMCE plug-ins to the editor by specifying them here.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Custom button.&#039;&#039;&#039; Add custom TinyMCE buttons to the editor by specifying them here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Button - Article===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in displays the Article button below the editor box when you are using a Joomla! editor (for example, when writing an Article). It allows you to insert an Article link into an Article. This plug-in has no options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Button - Image===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in displays the Image button below the editor box when you are using a Joomla! editor (for example, when writing an Article). It allows you to insert an image into an Article. This plug-in has no options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Button - Pagebreak===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in displays the Pagebreak button below the editor box when you are using a Joomla! editor (for example, when writing an Article). It inserts a page break in the Article. This plug-in has no options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Button - Readmore===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in displays the &amp;quot;Read more...&amp;quot; button below the editor box when you are using a Joomla! editor (for example, when writing an Article). It inserts a &amp;quot;Read more...&amp;quot; break in the Article that allows you to display just the first portion of an Article on a page. This plug-in has no options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Extension - Joomla===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in manages the update sites for extensions. This plug-in has no options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Search - Categories===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in enables searching for Category information. It has the following options: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-categories-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Search Limit.&#039;&#039;&#039; The maximum number of search results to return after a search is done.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Search Published.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to include published items in the search results.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Search Archived.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to include archived items in the search results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Search - Contacts===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in enables searching for Contacts. It has the following options: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-contacts-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Search Limit.&#039;&#039;&#039; The maximum number of search results to return after a search is done.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Search Published.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to include published items in the search results.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Search Archived.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to include archived items in the search results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Search - Content===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in enables searching for Articles. It has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-content-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Search Limit.&#039;&#039;&#039; The maximum number of search results to return after a search is done.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Articles.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to enable searching of all articles.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Archived Articles.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to include archived articles in the search results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Search - Newsfeeds===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in enables searching for News Feeds. It has the following options: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-newsfeeds-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Search Limit.&#039;&#039;&#039; The maximum number of search results to return after a search is done.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Search Published.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to include published items in the search results.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Search Archived.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to include archived items in the search results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Search - Weblinks===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in enables searching for Web Links. It has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-weblinks-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Search Limit.&#039;&#039;&#039; The maximum number of search results to return after a search is done.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Search Published.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to include published items in the search results.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Search Archived.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to include archived items in the search results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System - Language Filter===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in filters the displayed content depending on language. It should only be enabled when the Language Switcher module is published. This plug-in has no options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System - Cache===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in enables page caching. Page caching allows the web server to save snapshots of pages and use them when serving web pages. This improves the performance of your web site and reduces the workload of the server. This plug-in has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-cache-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Use Browser Caching.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to use the mechanism for storing a page cache in the local browser. Default is &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System - Debug===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in provides debugging information. The report is shown below the main screen of the front and backend interfaces of your Joomla! installation. It has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-debug-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed Groups.&#039;&#039;&#039; User groups that will see the debug information when enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Profiling&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to display the profiling waypoints information.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Queries.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to include the SQL query log in the debug information.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Memory Usage.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to include memory usage data in the debug information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Language Debug Options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-debug-language-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show errors when parsing language files.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to display a list of language files with errors due to their not being in compliance with the Joomla! language file specification.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Language Files.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to display the language files that have been loaded to generate the page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Language String.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to include undefined language strings in the debug information.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Strip First Word.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to always strip the first word in multi-word strings.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Strip From Start.&#039;&#039;&#039; Strips the specified words from the beginning of the language string. For multiple words separate each word with the pipe ( &#039;&#039;|&#039;&#039; ) character like so: word1|word2&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Strip From End.&#039;&#039;&#039; Strips the specified words from the end of the language string. For multiple words separate each word with the pipe ( &#039;&#039;|&#039;&#039; ) character like so: word1|word2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System - Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in enables system logging. A log is a file that contains information about the web site activity. It can be used to see a history of activity and to troubleshoot problems on the site. This plug-in has no options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System - Redirect===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in enables the Joomla! Redirect system to catch missing pages and redirect users. This plug-in has no options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System - Remember Me===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in provides &amp;quot;Remember Me&amp;quot; functionality. This allows the website to &amp;quot;remember&amp;quot; your username and password so that you can automatically be logged in when you return to the site. This plug-in has no options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===System - SEF===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in adds SEF support to links in the document. It operates directly on the HTML and does not require a special tag. This plug-in has no options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User - Profile===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in adds user profile capability to your website. Website users will be able to fill out profile fields that you enable in the options section of this plug-in. You can control what profile fields are shown in the new user registration form and/or each user&#039;s editable profile screen. To control what fields are shown in the new user registration form, set the field options in the section labeled &#039;&#039;User profile information required at registration&#039;&#039;. For profile fields shown in the user&#039;s profile screen which it editable after login, set the field option in the options section labeled &#039;&#039;Required user profile information&#039;&#039;. For each field you have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Required.&#039;&#039;&#039; The field is visible in user profiles and users are required to fill it out.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Optional.&#039;&#039;&#039; The field is visible in user profiles but is optional and users do not need to fill it out.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Disabled.&#039;&#039;&#039; The field is disabled and not visible in user profiles.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-profile-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
* All fields are text fields with the exception of the &#039;&#039;Terms of Service&#039;&#039; field. The &#039;&#039;Terms of Service&#039;&#039; field is a radio button that the user can click on to signify their agreement with the website&#039;s terms of service.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User - Contact Creator===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in automatically creates contact information for new users. It has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-contact_creator-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Automatic Webpage.&#039;&#039;&#039; A formatted string to automatically generate a contact&#039;s web page. [name] is replaced with the name, [username] is replaced with the username, [userid] is replaced with the user ID and [email] is replaced with the email.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Category.&#039;&#039;&#039; Category to assign contacts to by default.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Autopublish the contact.&#039;&#039;&#039; Optionally have the automatically created contact set to the published state and visible to your website visitors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User - Joomla!===&lt;br /&gt;
This plug-in handles the default user synchronization. It has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-edit-joomla-options-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-create Users.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to automatically create registered Joomla! users where possible. Default is &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*If you are using the TinyMCE editor, you can control which options appear on the editor&#039;s toolbar by setting the parameters in the &amp;quot;Editor - TinyMCE&amp;quot; plug-in.&lt;br /&gt;
*Starting with Joomla! 1.6, configurable plug-in settings are referred to as &#039;options&#039;. In previous versions of Joomla! these configurable settings were referred to as &#039;parameters&#039;. You may see the terms &#039;options&#039; and &#039;parameters&#039; used interchangeably in help documentation and tutorials you encounter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To install new Plug-in Extensions: [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Install|Extension Manager - Install Screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To uninstall third-party Plug-ins: [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Manage|Extension Manager - Manage]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Plugin Manager|Extensions}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Plugin_Manager&amp;diff=66061</id>
		<title>Help17:Extensions Plugin Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Plugin_Manager&amp;diff=66061"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:06:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
The plug-in manager is accessed from the back-end Joomla! administrator panel. It is used to edit an installed plug-in&#039;s details and options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions &amp;amp;rarr; Plug-in Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu of the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Joomla! Administrator Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Plug-in Manager allows you to enable and disable Joomla! plug-ins and to edit a plug-in&#039;s details and options. It is also useful for quickly enabling/disabling multiple plug-ins at once.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Checkbox.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check this box to select one or more items. To select all items, check the box in the column heading. After one or more boxes are checked, click a toolbar button to take an action on the selected item or items.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Name.&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the plug-in.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled.&#039;&#039;&#039; A green circle with a check mark or a red circle showing whether the use of the extension is enabled/disabled. Click the icon to toggle the item between enabled and disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering.&#039;&#039;&#039; Ordering. The order to display items. If the list is sorted by this column, you can change the order by clicking the arrows or by entering the sequential order and clicking the &#039;Save Order&#039; icon which looks like a little floppy disk. Note that the display order on a page is set in the &#039;Advanced Options&#039; section for each menu item. If that order is set to use something other than &#039;Order&#039; (for example, &#039;Title - Alphabetical&#039;), then the order value in this screen will be ignored. If the menu item&#039;s order option is set to use &#039;Order&#039;, then the items will display on the page based on the order in this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access.&#039;&#039;&#039; Which user &#039;access levels&#039; have access to this item. You can change an item&#039;s Access Level by clicking on its name to open it up for editing. The default user &#039;access levels&#039; which come preconfigured with Joomla! are:&lt;br /&gt;
** Public: Everyone has access including website visitors who have not logged in&lt;br /&gt;
** Registered: Only users with registered status or higher will have access&lt;br /&gt;
** Special: Only users with author status or higher have access&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Type of the plug-in. Some possible types are: authentication, content, editors, editors-xtd, search, system, and user. These are also the names of the website sub-directories where the plug-in files are located. For example, plug-ins with a type of &#039;authentication&#039; are located in the website directory &#039;plugins/authentication&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Element.&#039;&#039;&#039; The plug-in directory name which contains the plug-in&#039;s files. This directory will be located in the directory which corresponds to its type. For example, the &#039;Authentication - Joomla&#039; plug-in is of type &#039;Authentication&#039; and element &#039;joomla&#039;. So the website directory it is located in is &#039;plugins/authentication/joomla&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ID.&#039;&#039;&#039; The ID number. This is a unique identification number for this item assigned automatically by Joomla!. It is used to identify the item internally, for example in internal links. You cannot change this number.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Display #.&#039;&#039;&#039; The number of items to display on one page. Note that if you have a large number of items, it may be helpful to use the Filter options, located above the column headings, to limit which items display (where applicable).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==List Filters==&lt;br /&gt;
The list of plug-ins which appears on this screen may be very large. You can use one of the available filters or any combination of them to limit the number of plug-ins displayed to just the plug-ins which match your filter parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Partial Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can filter the list of items by typing in all of part of its name. Or you can select a combination of Access Level, Enable/Disable State and Type.&lt;br /&gt;
* Filter. In the upper left corner just above the column headings is a Filter field and two buttons, as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-filter-name.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a large number of items on the list, you can use this filter to find the desired item(s) quickly. Enter either all or part of the name and press &#039;Search&#039; to display the matching items. You can enter in whole words or part of a word. For example, &#039;ooml&#039; will match all titles with the word &#039;Joomla!&#039; in them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Access, State and Type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the upper right area, above the column headings, are 3 drop-down list boxes as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-filter-types.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The selections may be combined. Only items matching all selections will display in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Select Access. Select the &#039;Access Level&#039; from the drop-down list box to only show plug-ins accessible by uses of the selected &#039;Access Level&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select State. Select a state (Enabled or Disabled) from the drop-down list box to show only plug-ins with the selected state.&lt;br /&gt;
* Select Type. Select a Type from the drop-down list box to show only plug-ins of the selected Type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-plugin_manager-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select one item and click on this button to open it in edit mode. If you have more than one item selected (where applicable), the first item will be opened. You can also open an item for editing by clicking on its Name.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Enable.&#039;&#039;&#039; To enable one or more items, select them using the Checkbox and press this button. You may also toggle between Enabled and Disabled by clicking on the icon in the &#039;Enabled&#039; column.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Disable.&#039;&#039;&#039; To disable one or more items, select them using the Checkbox and press this button. You may also toggle between Enabled and Disabled by clicking on the icon in the &#039;Enabled&#039; column.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Check In.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Options.&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens the configuration window for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this window you can set &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; access permissions for each user group specified in your Joomla! installation.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Help.&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens this Help Screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*To enable or disable a group of Plug-ins, check the check box for each desired Plug-in and then click the Enable or Disable toolbar button.&lt;br /&gt;
*Starting with Joomla! 1.6, configurable plug-in settings are referred to as &#039;options&#039;. In previous versions of Joomla! these configurable settings were referred to as &#039;parameters&#039;. You may see the terms &#039;options&#039; and &#039;parameters&#039; used interchangeably in help documentation and tutorials you encounter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To change the Details or Options for a Plug-in: [[Help16:Extensions_Plugin_Manager_Edit|Plugin Manager - Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To install Plug-ins: [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Install|Extension Manager - Install]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To uninstall Plug-ins: [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Manage|Extension Manager - Manage]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Plugin Manager|Extensions}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Site_New&amp;diff=66060</id>
		<title>Help17:Extensions Module Manager Site New</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Site_New&amp;diff=66060"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:06:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to access==&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to the [[screen.modules.15|Module Manager]]. To create a new Module, press the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; button on the toolbar. To edit an existing Module, click on the Module Name or click on the Module&#039;s checkbox and press the Edit button on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you will add new Modules or edit existing Modules for the front end of your Joomla! web site. When you install Joomla!, 20 built-in Modules are available for use in the front end of your web site. Some Modules, like the Menu Module, are used in every Joomla! web site. Other Modules are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that all Module Types have the same fields in the Details and Menu Assignment sections. These are documented in the [[screen.modules.edit.15|Module Manager - New/Edit]] screen. Each Module Type has different Parameter fields. These are documented for each Module Type below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Module_new.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Note that if you install one or more Joomla! Extensions, these Extensions may add new Module Types. In this case, your screen will show additional Types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Module Types==&lt;br /&gt;
When the New button is pressed, the Module:[New] screen displays all of the Module Types available for the new Module. You can select the desired type either by clicking on the Module Name or by clicking on the Module&#039;s radio button and pressing the Next button on the toolbar. Note that you can cancel this action by pressing the Cancel button on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A standard Joomla! installation includes a number of default module types. Each has its own function and is described in detail on a separate page.  Additional module types, not listed below, may also have been installed on your Joomla site.  Help for those module types can be obtained by choosing the type then clicking on the Help toolbar button on the page that is then displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Articles_Archive|Archived Articles]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Articles_Categories|Articles Categories]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Articles_Category|Articles Category]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Latest_News|Latest News]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Articles_Newsflash|Articles - Newsflash]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Most_Read|Most Read Content]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Banners|Banners]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Breadcrumbs|Breadcrumbs]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Custom_HTML|Custom HTML]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Feed_Display|Feed Display]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Footer|Footer]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Language_Switcher|Language Switcher]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Login|Login]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Random_Image|Random Image]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Articles_Related|Articles - Related Articles]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Search|Search]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Statistics|Statistics]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Syndication_Feeds|Syndication Feeds]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Latest_Users|Latest Users]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Weblinks|Weblinks]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Who_Online|Who&#039;s Online]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Wrapper|Wrapper]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:banner_edit_toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are:&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Save}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Apply}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Close}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*Some Joomla! Extensions provide new Module Types. If you have installed any Extensions, your Joomla! site might have Module Types that are not listed here. In this case, please refer to the documentation for the Extension for information about these Module Types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To see help for the Module Details and Module Menu Assignment fields: [[screen.modules.edit.15|Module Manager - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To add or edit Modules: [[screen.modules.15|Module Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To work with Administrator Modules: [[screen.modulesadministrator.edit.15|Modules Administrator]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7Module Manager|Extensions}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Edit&amp;diff=66059</id>
		<title>Help17:Extensions Module Manager Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager_Edit&amp;diff=66059"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:06:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to the [[screen.modules.15|Module Manager]]. To create a new Module, press the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; button on the toolbar. To edit an existing Module, click on the Module Name or click on the Module&#039;s checkbox and press the Edit button on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you create new Modules or edit existing Modules. This screen has two links in the upper left: Site and Administrator. The Site link is selected by default. The Site link allows you to work with Modules that will be visible on your web site&#039;s Front-end. This is where you will place most of your Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Administrator link allows you to work with Modules that show on your web site&#039;s Back-end. In many cases, it is not necessary to modify the back-end Modules for Joomla!. All of the standard Joomla! administrator functions are available with no modifications here. You only need to make changes here if you want to change the standard administrator functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you create a new Module, you will select the Module Type. This will determine what type of content this Module can display. If you edit an existing Module, the Module Type will already be determined. Note that you cannot change the Module Type of an existing Module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For detailed information about each Module type for your web site, see the [[screen.modulessite.edit.15|Modules Site]] screen. For detailed information about modifying the Modules for the back end of your site, see [[screen.modulesadministrator.edit.15|Modules Administrator]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All Modules have two sections that are the same: Details and Menu Assignment. The Parameters are different for each Module Type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Module new details.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Details==&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Module Type.&#039;&#039;&#039; This displays the system name of the module. No entry is allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Title of the Module.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to show the Title of the Module.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not the Module is enabled. If &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;, the Module will not be shown on the page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Position&#039;&#039;&#039;. The Position on the page to show the Module. There are two types of Positions you can use.&lt;br /&gt;
*#You can select a Position from the drop-down list box. The Positions in the list box are those provided by your Template. You can see the available Positions on the page by adding the letters &amp;quot;?tp=1&amp;quot; to the end of any front-end Joomla! URL. For example, if your home page is &amp;quot;www.mysite.com&amp;quot;, you can type the URL &amp;quot;www.mysite.com?tp=1&amp;quot;. The page will display with labeled rectangles indicating each pre-defined Position for the current Template.&lt;br /&gt;
*#You can type in a Position that is different from the pre-defined positions (for example, &amp;quot;myposition1&amp;quot;). This type of Position can be used to insert a Module into an Article. If you enter the code &amp;quot;{loadposition xxx}&amp;quot; inside the text of an Article, where &amp;quot;xxx&amp;quot; matches the Position of a Module, and if the Module is assigned to the the Menu Selection where the Article is displayed (see [[#Menu Assignment|Menu Assignment]] below), then the Module will be displayed at that point in the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Order.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Order that this Module will be displayed within the Position. If more than one Module is displayed at the same position, this will determine the order of display. The drop-down list box shows all Modules displaying at the current Position. Select the Module that you want the current Module to &#039;&#039;follow&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
**You can also change the order of display in the [[screen.modules.15|Module Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
**The Module Order is only important when two or more Modules are displaying at the &#039;&#039;same Position&#039;&#039; and on the s&#039;&#039;ame Menu Selections&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Access Level}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Description.&#039;&#039;&#039; A description of what the Module does. No entry is allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Menu Assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you tell Joomla! which pages to show this Module on. This Module will show on the page when this Menu Item is selected. If the Menu Item allows the user to navigate to sub-pages, then this Module will also show on these sub-pages. For example, if the Menu item is a Blog Layout, the Module will also show when the user clicks on a &amp;quot;Read more...&amp;quot; link, an Article Link, or a Page Navigation link from that Blog Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus.&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;All&amp;quot; means show the current Module on all Menu Items. &amp;quot;None&amp;quot; means don&#039;t show the Module on any Menu Items. &amp;quot;Select Menu Item(s) from the List&amp;quot; allows you to select which Menu Items to show the Module on. &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Selection.&#039;&#039;&#039; If &amp;quot;Select Menu Items(s) from the List&amp;quot; above is selected, select individual Menu Items that will display the Module.&lt;br /&gt;
**Use Ctrl+Click to select multiple Menu Items.&lt;br /&gt;
**Use Shift+Click to select a range of Menu Items.&lt;br /&gt;
**If you want to select most of the Menu Items, first click &amp;quot;All&amp;quot; above under Menus and then click &amp;quot;Select Menu Items(s) from the List&amp;quot;. All of the Menu Items will be selected. Then use Ctrl+Click to deselect the Menu Items you don&#039;t want to include.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:banner_edit_toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Save}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Apply}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Close}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* You can insert a Joomla! Module inside an Article by typing &amp;quot;{loadposition xxx}&amp;quot;, where &amp;quot;xxx&amp;quot; is the position entered for the desired Module. Note that the position name must not conflict with a position used by your Joomla! template. It can be any name (e.g., &amp;quot;mymoduleposition1&amp;quot;) as long as it matches the position name typed in for the Module. The Menu Assignment for the Module must include the Menu Item where the Article is displayed, and the Plugin called &amp;quot;Content - Load Module&amp;quot; must be enabled (which it is by default). This feature allows you, for example, to insert a Custom HTML Module anywhere in an Article. See [[screen.content.edit.15|Article Manager - New/Edit]] for information about adding and editing Articles.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can easily change the order of display of Modules using the [[screen.modules.15|Module Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To see a description and Parameters for the different front-end Module types: [[screen.modulessite.edit.15|Modules Site]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To see a description and Parameters for the different back-end Module types: [[screen.modulesadministrator.edit.15|Modules Administrator]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To work with existing Modules: [[screen.modules.15|Module Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Module Manager|Extensions}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager&amp;diff=66058</id>
		<title>Help17:Extensions Module Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Module_Manager&amp;diff=66058"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:06:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions &amp;amp;rarr; Module Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu on the back-end of your Joomla! installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Module Manager is where you add and edit Joomla! Modules. In Joomla!, Modules are used to display content and/or media around the main content. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Module Facts:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#All Joomla! websites require at least 1 Menu Module&lt;br /&gt;
#All Other Module Types are Optional. (Examples: News, Banner, Latest News, Polls)&lt;br /&gt;
#Every Menu is accompanied by a menu module. (Example mod_mainmenu)&lt;br /&gt;
#Multiple occurrences of similar module types.&lt;br /&gt;
#Some Modules are linked to components. For example, each Menu Module is related to one Menu component. To define a Menu in Joomla!, you need to create the Menu and Menu Items using the Menus screens and then create the Module for the Menu using this screen. Other Modules, such as Custom HTML and Breadcrumbs, do not depend on any other content. See [[screen.modules.edit.15|Module Manager - New/Edit]] for information about the different Module Types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Joomla! installation is accompanied with 20 module types, additional 3rd party modules can be located at the [http://extensions.joomla.org/ JED].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Module_manager.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column&#039;s value.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Checkbox}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Module Name.&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the Module. You can click on the name to open the Module for editing.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enabled}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Order.&#039;&#039;&#039; The order to display modules within a Position. If the list is sorted by this column, you can change the display order of modules within a Position by selecting a Position in the &amp;quot;Select Position&amp;quot; filter and then clicking the arrows or by entering the sequential order and clicking &#039;Save Order&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Access Level}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Position}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pages}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Type}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Display #}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Module_manager_toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are:&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Enable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Disable}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Copy Module}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Delete}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Edit}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|New Module}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Site and Administrator Links&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
At the top left, above the Filter, you will see the following two links:[[Image:Module_manager_links.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Site.&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens the Site tab. This is the default tab and allows you to manage the Modules for the front end of the web site. &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Administrator.&#039;&#039;&#039; This tab allows you to manage the Modules for the back end administration of the web site. If you do not need to change the Joomla! administrator menus, no modifications are required here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==List Filters==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Partial Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can filter the list of items by typing part of the title or the ID number. Or, you can select a combination of Category and Published State.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|List Filter}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Template, Position, Type and Published State&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
In the upper right area, above the column headings, are following drop-down list boxes as shown below:[[Image:Module_manager_filters.png|center]] The selections may be combined. Only items matching both selections will display in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select Template}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select Position}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select Type}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select Enabled State}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*You can change the order of Modules within a Module Position as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the desired Position using the Position Filter. This will limit the list to Modules that are assigned to this Position.&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the order using the Up or Down arrows or by typing the order number and pressing the Save Order icon. The Modules will display in the new order within the Position.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can open a Module for editing by clicking on the Module Name. This opens the [[screen.modules.edit.15|Module Manager - New/Edit]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To create or edit Modules: [[screen.modules.edit.15|Module Manager - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To see the function and Parameters for all available front-end Modules: [[screen.modulessite.edit.15|Modules Site]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To see the function and Parameters for all available back-end (administrator) Modules: [[screen.modulesadministrator.edit.15|Modules Administrator]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To view a list of all installed Modules and install or uninstall Modules: [[screen.installer.15#Modules Screen|Extension Manager - Modules Screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To work with Menus: [[screen.menumanager.15|Menu Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To work with Banners: [[screen.banners.15|Banner Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Module Manager|Extensions}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Warnings&amp;diff=66057</id>
		<title>Help17:Extensions Extension Manager Warnings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Warnings&amp;diff=66057"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:06:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen is accessed from the back-end Joomla! administrator panel. It will display warnings related to your installed extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
*Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions → Extension Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu of the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Joomla! Administrator Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;. Then select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Warnings&#039;&#039;&#039; menu item in the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extension manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; screen that appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen will display any warnings related to extensions you have installed in your Joomla! installation. Warnings such as possible conflicts in your installation or dependency failures may appear here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-extension_manager-warnings-screen.png‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help-extension_manager-install-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Options.&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens the configuration window for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extension Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this window you can set &#039;&#039;&#039;Extension Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; access permissions for each user group specified in your Joomla! installation.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Help.&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens this Help Screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Links to Other Screens&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top left, you will see the following five links:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-extension_manager-warnings-menu.png‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Install.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Install|Install Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Update.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Update|Update Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Manage|Manage Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Discover.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Discover|Discover Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Warnings.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Warnings|Warnings Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Extension Management|Warnings}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Update&amp;diff=66056</id>
		<title>Help17:Extensions Extension Manager Update</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Update&amp;diff=66056"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:06:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen is accessed from the back-end Joomla! administrator panel. It is used to update extensions that are installed in your Joomla! installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
*Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions → Extension Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu of the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Joomla! Administrator Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;. Then select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Update&#039;&#039;&#039; menu item in the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extension manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; screen that appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows you to update installed extensions. The extension update feature is new to Joomla! 1.6 and you will only be able to update extensions which support this feature. For extensions which support this feature, you will be able to perform an in-place update of the extension without having to upload and install the updated extension files like you did with previous versions of Joomla!. The update feature utilizes standard HTTP connection mechanisms to download the extension update files from a remote update server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-extension_manager-update-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Checkbox.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check this box to select one or more items. To select all items, check the box in the column heading. After one or more boxes are checked, click a toolbar button to take an action on the selected item or items.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Name.&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the extension.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Install Type.&#039;&#039;&#039; The type of installation that will be performed by the update. Usually this will be type &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Update&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; which will perform an in-place update of the extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Extension Type.&#039;&#039;&#039; The extension type. Examples of extension types are module, plug-in, template, component, or language.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version.&#039;&#039;&#039; The version number of the available update.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Folder.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the extension is a plug-in, the subdirectory of your Joomla! installation&#039;s /plugins directory where the extension is located. By default Joomla! 1.6 has the following subdirectories in the plugins directory which each represent the different types of plug-ins that are defined: authentication, content, editors, editors-xtd, extension, search, system, user.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Client.&#039;&#039;&#039; Specifies if this is a site or administrator extension.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;URL Details.&#039;&#039;&#039; The URL for the extension update XML file which contains the information needed by your Joomla! installation to perform the update.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Display #.&#039;&#039;&#039; The number of items to display on one page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-extension_manager-update-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Update.&#039;&#039;&#039; Update the selected extension(s).&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Find Updates.&#039;&#039;&#039; Scan your Joomla! installation and locate extensions with an available update.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Purge Cache.&#039;&#039;&#039; Clear the available extension update information displayed in the listing.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Options.&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens the configuration window for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extension Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this window you can set &#039;&#039;&#039;Extension Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; access permissions for each user group specified in your Joomla! installation.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Help.&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens this Help Screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Links to Other Screens&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top left, you will see the following five links:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-extension_manager-update-menu.png‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Install.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Install|Install Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Update.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Update|Update Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Manage|Manage Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Discover.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Discover|Discover Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Warnings.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Warnings|Warnings Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* Only extensions which support the new Joomla! 1.6 update system will be listed in this screen. If you use extensions which do not support the new update system or you are not sure, consult the extension developer&#039;s website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* It is critical to keep your extensions up-to-date. Failure to do so may expose a vulnerability in your Joomla! installation which can be exploited by hackers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* It is recommended to backup your Joomla! installation files and database before attempting to update extensions or the Joomla! installation itself. This will ensure that you can restore your Joomla! installation to its previous state if the update fails or causes unexpected results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Extension Management|Update}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Manage&amp;diff=66055</id>
		<title>Help17:Extensions Extension Manager Manage</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Manage&amp;diff=66055"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:05:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen is accessed from the back-end Joomla! administrator panel. It is used to enable/disable/uninstall extensions that are installed in your Joomla! installation. Some examples of extensions are plug-ins, components, and site templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
*Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions → Extension Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu of the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Joomla! Administrator Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;. Then select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039; menu item in the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extension manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; screen that appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows you to Enable/Disable extensions. To Enable/Disable an extension is the same as to Publish/Unpublish it. In addition you can uninstall extensions from this screen as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-extension_manager-manage-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Checkbox.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check this box to select one or more items. To select all items, check the box in the column heading. After one or more boxes are checked, click a toolbar button to take an action on the selected item or items.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Name.&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the extension.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Extension Type.&#039;&#039;&#039; The extension type. Some examples of extension types are module, plug-in, template, or language.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled.&#039;&#039;&#039; A green circle with a check mark or a red circle showing whether the use of the extension is enabled/disabled. Click the icon to toggle the item between enabled and disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version.&#039;&#039;&#039; The version number of the Extension.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Date.&#039;&#039;&#039; The date this extension was released.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Folder.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the extension is a plug-in, the subdirectory of your Joomla! installation&#039;s /plugins directory where the extension is located. By default Joomla! 1.6 has the following subdirectories in the plugins directory which each represent the different types of plug-ins that are defined: authentication, content, editors, editors-xtd, extension, search, system, user.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Client.&#039;&#039;&#039; Specifies if this is a site or administrator extension.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Author.&#039;&#039;&#039; The author of this extension.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Id.&#039;&#039;&#039; The ID number. This is a unique identification number for this item assigned automatically by Joomla!. It is used to identify the item internally, for example in internal links. You cannot change this number.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Display #.&#039;&#039;&#039; The number of items to display on one page. Note that if you have a large number of items, it may be helpful to use the Filter options, located above the column headings, to limit which items display (where applicable).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==List Filters==&lt;br /&gt;
The list of extensions which appears on this screen may be very large. You can use one of the available filters or any combination of them to limit the number of extensions displayed to just the extensions which match your filter parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Partial Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-extension_manager-manage-filter-name.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a large number of extensions in the list, you can use this filter to find the desired extension(s) quickly. Enter either all or part of the extension name and press &#039;Search&#039; to display the matching extensions. For example, &amp;quot;joom&amp;quot; will match all extension names with the word &amp;quot;Joomla!&amp;quot; in them. This filter is not case-sensitive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Hide Protected Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-extension_manager-manage-filter-protected.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check this checkbox to hide extensions which are protected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Extension Type, Plug-in Folder, and Extension Client&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-extension_manager-manage-filter-types.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Select type. Select the extension type from the drop-down list box of available types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Select folder. Select a plug-in folder from the drop-down list box of available folders. There is a separate folder for each type of plug-in defined in your installation of Joomla!.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Select client. Select an extension client from the drop-down list box of available clients. There are two clients - Site and Administrator. Site clients are extensions which are designed for use in areas outside of the administrator interface. Administrator extensions are for the back-end administrative functions of your Joomla! installation. Usually you would only directly interact with these extensions through the administrator web interface.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-extension_manager-manage-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Publish.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enable the selected extension(s).&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublish.&#039;&#039;&#039; Disable the selected extension(s).&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Refresh cache.&#039;&#039;&#039; Refresh the information displayed for the selected extension(s).&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Uninstall.&#039;&#039;&#039; Uninstall the selected extension(s).&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Options.&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens the configuration window for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extension Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this window you can set &#039;&#039;&#039;Extension Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; access permissions for each user group specified in your Joomla! installation.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Help.&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens this Help Screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Links to Other Screens&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top left, you will see the following five links:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-extension_manager-manage-menu.png‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Install.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Install|Install Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Update.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Update|Update Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Manage|Manage Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Discover.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Discover|Discover Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Warnings.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Warnings|Warnings Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* Throughout the administrator interface of Joomla! you will see the terms &amp;quot;Publish&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Unpublish&amp;quot;. &#039;&#039;Publish&#039;&#039; means the same thing as &#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;Activate&#039;&#039;. &#039;&#039;Unpublish&#039;&#039; means the same thing as &#039;&#039;Disable&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;Deactivate&#039;&#039;. You may see the terms used interchangeably in extension screens and help documentation you find online.&lt;br /&gt;
* Some information such as &#039;&#039;Date&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;Author&#039;&#039; may not be displayed for an extension. This is not a problem. It merely means the information was not specified by the extension developer in the extension&#039;s installation package.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Extension Management|Manage}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Install&amp;diff=66054</id>
		<title>Help17:Extensions Extension Manager Install</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Install&amp;diff=66054"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:05:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen is accessed from the back-end Joomla! administrator panel. It is used to install extensions into your Joomla! installation. Some examples of extensions are plug-ins, components, and site templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
*Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions → Extension Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu of the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Joomla! Administrator Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;. Then select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Install&#039;&#039;&#039; menu item in the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extension manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; screen that appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
Extensions are add-ons that expand the functionality of Joomla!. Extensions are used to add capabilities to Joomla! that do not exist in the standard package. Hundreds of Extensions are available for Joomla!, with more being developed all of the time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extensions are categorized into five types, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* A &#039;&#039;Component&#039;&#039; is a mini-application that renders the main body of the page. Examples of Components are Contacts, the Front Page, and News Feeds.&lt;br /&gt;
* A &#039;&#039;Module&#039;&#039; is a smaller Extension typically used for rendering a small element that displays across multiple pages. Examples of Modules include Menus and Related Items.&lt;br /&gt;
* A &#039;&#039;Plugin&#039;&#039; is a section of code that runs when a pre-defined event happens within Joomla!. For example, editors are Plugins that run when an edit session is opened.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039; Extension allows for the Front-end and Back-end of Joomla! to be presented in any language for which a language Extension exists. This way, Joomla! can be released in a new language with no changes to the core program.&lt;br /&gt;
* A &#039;&#039;Template&#039;&#039; controls the way the content of a web site is displayed, including the location and layout of elements, colors, fonts, and so on. Templates allow the appearance of the web site to be separated from its content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-extension_manager-install-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help-extension_manager-install-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Options.&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens the configuration window for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extension Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this window you can set &#039;&#039;&#039;Extension Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; access permissions for each user group specified in your Joomla! installation.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Help.&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens this Help Screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Links to Other Screens&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top left, you will see the following five links:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help-extension_manager-install-menu.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Install.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Install|Install Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Update.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Update|Update Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Manage|Manage Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Discover.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Discover|Discover Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Warnings.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Warnings|Warnings Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Outline==&lt;br /&gt;
Joomla! Extensions can be installed using one of three methods, as indicated below. Only one method is needed to install a given Extension.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The normal procedure for installing a Joomla! Extension is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
# Download one or more archive files (normally &amp;quot;.zip&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;tar.gz&amp;quot; format) from the Extension provider&#039;s web site to a local directory on your computer. Note that some Extensions are installed as one file (for example, one Component or Module) while other Extensions might have two or more files (for example, a Component and a Module). If there are two or more parts, each one will have its own archive file.&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose one of the methods describe below (&#039;&#039;&#039;usually Package File&#039;&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
# When it is finished, the screen will display the message &amp;quot;Install Component Success&amp;quot;. If the installation is not successful, an error message will display.&lt;br /&gt;
# Depending on the Extension, it may be necessary to enable the Extension (for example, in the [[Help16:Extensions_Module_Manager|Module Manager]] or [[Help16:Extensions_Plugin_Manager|Plugin Manager]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Package File.&#039;&#039;&#039; (the common way)&lt;br /&gt;
*# Browse to the location where you downloaded the Extension&#039;s archive file. &lt;br /&gt;
*# Then press &amp;quot;Upload File &amp;amp; Install&amp;quot;. Joomla! will read the contents of the archive file and install the Extension. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Install Directory.&#039;&#039;&#039; As an alternative to installing from an archive file, you can follow the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
*#Create a temporary directory on your local hard drive and unpack the Extension&#039;s archive file in this temporary directory.&lt;br /&gt;
*#Using FTP, upload the contents of this directory (including files and subdirectories) to a directory on your server.&lt;br /&gt;
*#In the &#039;&#039;Install Directory&#039;&#039; field specify the server directory where you uploaded the files and subdirectories of the package. &lt;br /&gt;
*#Click on the &#039;&#039;Install&#039;&#039; button and Joomla! will install the contents of the given directory. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Install URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; A third alternative for installing an Extension is as follows. Instead of downloading the archive file to your local computer, just specify the URL of the target archive file. Then click the &amp;quot;Install&amp;quot; button and Joomla! automatically installs it directly from this URL. &#039;&#039;Note that, with this method, you will not have a copy of the archive file on your local computer.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Three alternate installation methods are available, as indicated above. The most common one is the &amp;quot;Upload Package File&amp;quot; method.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you want to install a third-party Module or Plugin that belongs to a Component, you will generally need to install the Component as well as the Module or Plugin in order to use the Module or Plugin. This is normally documented in the Extension&#039;s installation instructions on the author&#039;s web site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Similarly, if you uninstall a third-party Component that also has its own Modules or Plugins, these Modules and Plugins can no longer be used. So it is normally recommended to uninstall these dependent Modules and Plugins as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Some Components developed by third party developers may have their own Modules or Plugins included in the installer. In this case, make sure these Module or Plugin directories are writable. Otherwise the Extension will not work properly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;SECURITY WARNING:&#039;&#039;&#039; It is recommended that you use only those third-party Extensions on your site that you really need. Do not use your live site for testing purposes because it may compromise your site and server. Test new extensions on a local test web site before deploying them on your live site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not install Joomla! Extensions downloaded from warez sites because they may be infected by a virus or malware that cause damage on the server and can contaminate the computer of your visitors! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Installing from remote URL can be dangerous. For this reason, it is generally recommended that you use the &amp;quot;Upload Package File&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Install from Directory&amp;quot; options when installing new Extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*If you install a Component Extension, it will be listed as a new Menu Item in the &#039;&#039;Components&#039;&#039; menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can assign a Menu Item to an installed Component Extension in the [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Item_Manager|Menu Item Manager]] by clicking the &#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039; toolbar button. The new Component will show in the Internal Link list of Menu Item Types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you install a Module Extension, it will be added to the list of the Modules in the [[Help16:Extensions_Module_Manager|Module Manager]], where you can enable/disable it. You can also customize it&#039;s parameters in the [[Help16:Extensions_Module_Manager_Edit|Module Edit]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*An installed Plugin Extension will be added to the list of the [[Help16:Extensions_Plugin_Manager|Plugin Manager]], where you can enable/disable it. You can also customize its parameters in the [[Help16:Extensions_Plugin_Manager_Edit|Plugin Edit]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*An installed Template Extension will be added to the Site or Administrator list of the [[Help16:Extensions_Template_Manager_Styles|Template Manager]] where you can assign it to all of the pages or to the selected ones. You can also customize its parameters, edit the HTML or CSS source, or preview the available Module positions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*An installed Language Extension will be added to the Site or Administrator list of the [[Help16:Extensions_Language_Manager_Installed|Language Manager]], depending on the client attribute of the Extension. This screen let&#039;s you assign it as the default language, if desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Extension Management|Install}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Discover&amp;diff=66053</id>
		<title>Help17:Extensions Extension Manager Discover</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Discover&amp;diff=66053"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:05:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen is accessed from the back-end Joomla! administrator panel. It is used to discover and install extensions into your Joomla! installation. Some examples of extensions are plug-ins, components, and site templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
*Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions → Extension Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu of the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Joomla! Administrator Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;. Then select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Discover&#039;&#039;&#039; menu item in the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extension manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; screen that appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows you to discover extensions that have not gone through the normal installation process. This provides a method to install large extensions which are not possible to install using the normal process. For example, some extensions are too large in file size to upload using the web interface due to limitations of the web hosting environment. Using this feature you can upload extension files directly to your web server using some other means such as FTP or SFTP and place those extension files into the appropriate directory. You can then use the discover feature to find the newly uploaded extension and activate it in your Joomla! installation. Using the discover operation you can also discover and install multiple extensions at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-extension_manager-discover-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Checkbox.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check this box to select one or more items. To select all items, check the box in the column heading. After one or more boxes are checked, click a toolbar button to take an action on the selected item or items.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Name.&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the extension.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Extension Type.&#039;&#039;&#039; The extension type - module, plug-in, template, language.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version.&#039;&#039;&#039; The version number of the Extension.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Date.&#039;&#039;&#039; The date this extension was released.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Folder.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the extension is a plug-in, the subdirectory of your Joomla! installation&#039;s /plugins directory where the extension is located. By default Joomla! 1.6 has the following subdirectories in the plugins directory which each represent the different types of plug-ins that are defined by default: authentication, content, editors, editors-xtd, extension, search, system, user.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Client.&#039;&#039;&#039; Specifies if this is a site or administrator extension.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Author.&#039;&#039;&#039; The author of this extension.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;ID.&#039;&#039;&#039; The ID number. This is a unique identification number for this item assigned automatically by Joomla!. It is used to identify the item internally, for example in internal links. You cannot change this number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-extension_manager-discover-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Install.&#039;&#039;&#039; Installs the selected extension.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Discover.&#039;&#039;&#039; Searches the Joomla! installation directories for uninstalled extensions. Any uninstalled extensions found will be displayed in the extension listing. Caches the search results so they continue to be displayed on subsequent visits to this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Purge cache.&#039;&#039;&#039; Purges the cache of uninstalled extensions that were discovered. This will clear the listing of uninstalled extensions listed in this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Options.&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens the configuration window for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Extension Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this window you can set &#039;&#039;&#039;Extension Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; access permissions for each user group specified in your Joomla! installation.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Help.&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens this Help Screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Links to Other Screens&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top left, you will see the following five links:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-extension_manager-discover-menu.png‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Install.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Install|Install Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Update.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Update|Update Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Manage|Manage Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Discover.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Discover|Discover Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Warnings.&#039;&#039;&#039; Links to the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Warnings|Warnings Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Outline==&lt;br /&gt;
An extension can be installed with the discover function by doing the following steps:&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload the uncompressed extension files to the appropriate directory in your Joomla! installation. For example, if you wanted to upload a site template extension to your Joomla! installation you would create a directory for the template extension in the /templates sub-directory of your Joomla! installation. Then you would upload the template extension files into that directory you created.&lt;br /&gt;
# After you have uploaded the extension files, go back to the Extension Manager Discover screen and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Discover&#039;&#039;&#039; item in the toolbar. This will initiate the search function which will search your Joomla! extension directories looking for uninstalled extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
# If the extension you uploaded is compatible with Joomla! 1.6 and is not already installed, it will appear in the listing of discovered extensions in this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the check-box to the left of the discovered extension and then click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Install&#039;&#039;&#039; item in the toolbar. This will install the extension into your Joomla! installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* If you have many extensions you want to install you can upload them all into the appropriate directories of your Joomla! installation and then use this screen to discover all of them in one operation. You can then install all of the extensions in one step by selecting all of them and pressing the &#039;&#039;&#039;Install&#039;&#039;&#039; item in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*If you install a Component Extension, it will be listed as a new Menu Item in the &#039;&#039;Components&#039;&#039; menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can assign a Menu Item to an installed Component Extension in the [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Item_Manager|Menu Item Manager]] by clicking the &#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039; toolbar button. The new Component will show in the Internal Link list of Menu Item Types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you install a Module Extension, it will be added to the list of the Modules in the [[Help16:Extensions_Module_Manager|Module Manager]], where you can enable/disable it. You can also customize it&#039;s parameters in the [[Help16:Extensions_Module_Manager_Edit|Module Edit]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*An installed Plugin Extension will be added to the list of the [[Help16:Extensions_Plugin_Manager|Plugin Manager]], where you can enable/disable it. You can also customize its parameters in the [[Help16:Extensions_Plugin_Manager_Edit|Plugin Edit]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*An installed Template Extension will be added to the Site or Administrator list of the [[Help16:Extensions_Template_Manager_Styles|Template Manager]] where you can assign it to all of the pages or to the selected ones. You can also customize its parameters, edit the HTML or CSS source, or preview the available Module positions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*An installed Language Extension will be added to the Site or Administrator list of the [[Help16:Extensions_Language_Manager_Installed|Language Manager]], depending on the client attribute of the Extension. This screen let&#039;s you assign it as the default language, if desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7Extension Management|Discover}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Content_Featured_Articles&amp;diff=66052</id>
		<title>Help17:Content Featured Articles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Content_Featured_Articles&amp;diff=66052"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:04:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Content &amp;amp;rarr; Front Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu in the back-end of your Joomla! installation. You can also click on the &amp;quot;Front Page Manager&amp;quot; icon in the [[screen.cpanel.15|Control Panel]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Front Page Manager is the place where you control which Articles are displayed on the Front Page and in what order they are displayed. The Front Page is often the Home page of a web site, but it can be any page in the site. The Front Page is created using a Menu Item with the Front Page layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:front_page_manager.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column&#039;s value.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Checkbox}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Article Published}}&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Order&#039;&#039;&#039;. The order in which to display the Articles on the Front Page. If the list is sorted by this column, you can change the order by clicking the arrows or by entering the sequential order and clicking &#039;Save Order&#039;. Note that the display order on the Front Page is set in the Parameters - Advanced section for the  [[Screen.menus.edit.15#Front Page Blog Layout|Front Page Blog Menu Item]]. To sort Front Page Articles using this Order value, set the Category Order to &amp;quot;No. Order by Primary Order Only&amp;quot; and set the Primary Order to &amp;quot;Default&amp;quot;. If these Parameters are set to other values (for example, &amp;quot;Oldest First&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Title (Alphabetical)&amp;quot;), then the Articles will be sorted that way and this column will be ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Access Level}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Author}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Display #}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:front_page_toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are:&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Archive}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Publish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Unpublish}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Remove.&#039;&#039;&#039; To remove one or more Articles from the Front Page, click on the checkbox for each Article and press the Remove button. The removed Articles may still be available on other pages. This only removes them from the Front Page.&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==List Filters==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Partial Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can filter the list of items either by entering in part of the title or the ID number. You can also select a combination of Section, Category, Author, and Published State.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|List Filter}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Section, Category, Author, Published State&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
In the area in the upper right, above the column headings, there are 4 drop-down list boxes as shown below:[[Image:article_manager_filter2.png|center]] The selections may be combined. Only items matching all selections will display in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select Section}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select Category}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select Author}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select State}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* Only the Articles that have already been added to the Front Page will display on this screen. Articles can be added to the Front Page in the [[screen.content.15|Article Manager]] or when an Article is added or edited in [[screen.content.edit.15|Article Manager - New/Edit]].&lt;br /&gt;
* You can control the number of columns, number of articles, and other features of the Front Page layout in the [[screen.menus.edit.15#Front Page Blog Layout|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit - Front Page Blog Layout]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* To change the way Articles are displayed on the Front Page Layout: [[screen.menus.edit.15#Front Page Blog Layout|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit - Front Page Blog Layout]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Articles: [[screen.content.15|Article Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Categories: [[screen.categories.15|Category Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Sections: [[screen.sections.15|Section Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Users: [[screen.users.15|User Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Frontpage Manager|Content}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Content_Article_Manager_Edit&amp;diff=66051</id>
		<title>Help17:Content Article Manager Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Content_Article_Manager_Edit&amp;diff=66051"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:04:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
You can access the Article:[New] page either by pressing the &#039;Add New Article&#039; button on the Control Panel or by clicking the &#039;New&#039; button on the Article Manager. You can access the Article:[Edit] page from the Article Manager either by clicking on an Article&#039;s Title or by clicking the Article&#039;s check box and then clicking the &#039;Edit&#039; button. Both screens have the same functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This is the back-end screen where you can add and edit Articles. The same screen is used for adding a new Article and editing an existing Article. You can also select the Section and Category for an Article and indicate whether or not it is Published and if it is selected to appear on the Front Page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Article&#039;s content is edited using the default editor selected in the [[screen.users.edit.15|User Manager - New/Edit]]. The Joomla! default editor is called TinyMCE. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A number of Parameters can be set for the Article. Metadata can also be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:article_edit.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Heading Information==&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the heading information for the Article, as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:article_edit_header1.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Published}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Alias}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Front Page}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Section}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Category}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right side of the header area, information about the Article is displayed, as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:article_edit_header2.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Reset button.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press this button to change the Hits to 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Article, Image, Page Break, Read More, and Toggle Editor Buttons==&lt;br /&gt;
Five buttons are located just below the edit window, as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help17-content-article_manager-editor-buttons.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk17:toolbaricon|Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk17:toolbaricon|Page Break}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk17:toolbaricon|Read More}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk17:toolbaricon|Toggle Editor}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==TinyMCE editor==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk:TinyMCE}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==No editor==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk:No editor}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Parameters - Article==&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to enter parameters for this Article, as shown below: [[Image:article_parameters_article.png|center]] These entries are optional. Joomla! automatically creates default entries for these values.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Author}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Author Alias}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Access Level}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Created Date}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Start Publishing}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Finish Publishing}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Parameters - Advanced==&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to enter additional parameters for this Article, as shown below:[[Image:article_parameters_advanced.png|center]]These parameters allow you to override the parameters set in the Parameter/Global Configuration setup in the [[screen.content.15|Article Manager]] and the Parmeters - Component settings in the [[screen.menus.15|Menu Item Manager]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A value of &#039;Use Global&#039; means that either the setting from the Menu Item or the setting from the Global Configuration will control the action. A setting other than &#039;Use Global&#039; will always control the action and override settings from these other areas. The setting here takes top priority. The setting in the Menu Item is second priority. The setting in the Global Configuration controls if both of the other setting are set to &#039;Use Global&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Intro Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Name}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Article Rating}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Author Name}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Created Date and Time}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Modified Date and Time}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|PDF Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Print Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|E-mail Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Content Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Key Reference}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Alternative Read More: Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Metadata Information==&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to enter Metadata Information for this Article. Metadata is information about the Article that is not displayed but is available to Search Engines and other systems to classify the Article. This gives you more control over how the content will be analyzed by these programs. All of these entries are optional. The entry screen is shown below:[[Image:article_metadata.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Metadata Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Metadata Keywords}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Metadata Robots}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Metadata Author}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:article_edit_toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Preview}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Save}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Apply}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Close}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* The hierarchy of display parameters is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
*# &#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039; for the specific Article. A setting other than &#039;Use Global&#039; here always controls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
*# &#039;&#039;Parameters - Component&#039;&#039; for the Menu Item. If the Parameters - Advanced above is &#039;Use Global&#039; and this setting is not &#039;Use Global&#039;, then this controls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
*# &#039;&#039;Global Configuration&#039;&#039; settings in the Article Manager/Parameters section. Settings here only apply if both of the above are set to &#039;Use Global&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
:Example: The &#039;Title Linkable&#039; setting in the Article&#039;s &#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039; section is set to &#039;Use Global&#039;. The Menu Item is an Article Layout, and &#039;Title Linkable&#039; in the &#039;Parameters - Component&#039; is &#039;No&#039;. The Global Configuration &#039;Title Linkable&#039; is set to &#039;Yes&#039;. The result will be &#039;Yes&#039;, since the Menu Item overrides the Global Configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can add images using either the TinyMCE Insert/Edit Image icon or the Image button below the edit area. For adding new images in an Article, it is easier to use the Image button (below the edit area). This is because it lets you browse to the image file and also lets you upload images. However, for editing an existing image, you need to use the TinyMCE icon. The Image button only supports adding new images.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Read more...&#039; breaks allow you to save space on the Front Page or on any blog layout page by showing just the first portion of an Article. &#039;Pagebreaks&#039; allow you to provide multi-page navigation for long Articles. You can use both on one Article, if desired. For example, you could put a &#039;Read more...&#039; break after the first paragraph of a multi-page article, and have Pagebreaks after each page. No page navigation would display on the Front Page until the User selects the &#039;Read more...&#039; link. At that time, the Article&#039;s table of contents would display showing links to every page.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can insert a Joomla! Module inside an Article by typing &amp;quot;{loadposition xxx}&amp;quot;, where &amp;quot;xxx&amp;quot; is the position entered for the desired Module. Note that the position name must not conflict with a position used by your Joomla! template. It can be any name (e.g., &amp;quot;mymoduleposition1&amp;quot;) as long as it matches the position name typed in for the Module. The Menu Assignment for the Module must include the Menu Item where the Article is displayed, and the Plugin called &amp;quot;Content - Load Module&amp;quot; must be enabled (which it is by default). This feature allows you, for example, to insert a Custom HTML Module anywhere in an Article. See [[screen.modules.edit.15|Module Manager - New/Edit]] for information about adding modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* To find and edit existing Articles: [[Help17:Content_Article_Manager|Article Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* For help on using TinyMCE and other editors: [[Content editors|Content editors]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7Article Manager|Content}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Content_Article_Manager&amp;diff=66050</id>
		<title>Help17:Content Article Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Content_Article_Manager&amp;diff=66050"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:04:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to access==&lt;br /&gt;
Click the Article Manager icon in the [[Help16:Site_Control_Panel|Control Panel]], or click &#039;Article Manager&#039; in the &#039;Content&#039; menu in the back-end of your Joomla! installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Article Manager is the place in the back-end where you can add and manage all of the articles for your web site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help17-content-article_manager-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column&#039;s value.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Checkbox}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk17:colheader|Status}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Featured.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not the Article will show on the Featured Articles Page. You can change an Article&#039;s published state by clicking on the icon in the column.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Category}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Access}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Created by.&#039;&#039;&#039; Name of the Joomla! User who created this item.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Date.&#039;&#039;&#039; The date this Article was created. This date is added automatically by Joomla!, but you may change it in the Publishing Options - Article section of the [[Help16:Content_Article_Manager_Edit|Content Article Manager Edit]].&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Hits}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the following toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help17-content-article manager-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are:&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|New}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Edit}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Publish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Unpublish}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Featured.&#039;&#039;&#039; Marks selected items as Featured. Works with one or multiple items selected.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Archive}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Checkin}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Trash}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Options}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==List Filters==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Partial Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can filter the list of items either by entering in part of the title or the ID number. Or you can select a combination of Section, Category, Author, and Published State.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|1.6 List Filter}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Status, Category, Access, Author, Language&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
In the upper right area, above the column headings, are 5 drop-down list boxes as shown below:[[Image:article_manager_filter_1-6.png|center]] The selections may be combined. Only items matching all selections will display in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select State}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select Category}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Access.&#039;&#039;&#039; Use the drop-down list box to select the desired Access.  Only items with this level of Access will display.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select Author}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Batch process the selected categories===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk17:BatchProcess_Articles}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Options==&lt;br /&gt;
This pop-up screen is shown when the User clicks the &#039;Options&#039; button on the Toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Screenshots===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Article-Manager-Articles-Global.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
-----[[Image:Article-Manager-Category-Global.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
-----[[Image:Article-Manager-Categories-Global.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
-----[[Image:Article-Manager-Blog_Featured_Layouts-Global.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
-----[[Image:Article-Manager-List_Layouts-Global.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
-----[[Image:Article-Manager-Integration-Global.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
-----[[Image:Article-Manager-Text_Filters-Global.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
-----[[Image:Article-Manager-Permissions-Global.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Column Headers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Show Unauthorized Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Show Article Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Show Intro Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Section Name}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Section Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Category Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Category Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Author Name}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Created Date and Time}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Modified Date and Time}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Show Navigation}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Read more... Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Article Rating/Voting}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Icons}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global PDF Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Print Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global E-mail Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Hits}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global For each feed item show}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Filtering Options (HTML)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Web sites can be attacked by users entering in special HTML code. Filtering is a way to protect your Joomla! web site. Joomla! 1.6 brings new filtering options to give you more control over the HTML that your content providers are allowed to submit. You can be as strict or as liberal as you desire, depending on your site&#039;s needs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to understand that filtering occurs at the time an article is saved, &#039;&#039;after&#039;&#039; it has been written or edited. Depending on your editor and filter settings, it is possible for a user to add HTML to an article during the edit session only to have that HTML removed from the article when it is saved. This can sometimes cause confusion or frustration. If you have filtering set up on your site, make sure your users understand what types of HTML are allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default setting, as of Joomla! version 1.6, is that all users will have &amp;quot;black list&amp;quot; filtering on by default. This is designed to protect against markup commonly associated with web site attacks. So, if you do not set any filtering options, all users will have &amp;quot;black list&amp;quot; filtering done using the default list of filtered items. If you create a filter here, this overrides the default, and the default filter is no longer in effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To access the filtering settings, click on Options and select &#039;Text filters&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each user group on your site you can specify what type of filtering is applied to their edits.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Filter Types====&lt;br /&gt;
There are four types of filters: Black List, White List, No HTML and No Filtering.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Black List Filters=====&lt;br /&gt;
The default filter method in Joomla! is &#039;Black List&#039;. The default &#039;Black List&#039; contains the following tags to exclude:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;applet&#039;, &#039;body&#039;, &#039;bgsound&#039;, &#039;base&#039;, &#039;basefont&#039;, &#039;embed&#039;, &#039;frame&#039;, &#039;frameset&#039;, &#039;head&#039;, &#039;html&#039;, &#039;id&#039;, &#039;iframe&#039;, &#039;ilayer&#039;, &#039;layer&#039;, &#039;link&#039;, &#039;meta&#039;, &#039;name&#039;, &#039;object&#039;, &#039;script&#039;, &#039;style&#039;, &#039;title&#039;, &#039;xml&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default &#039;Black List&#039; contains the following attributes to exclude:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;action&#039;, &#039;background&#039;, &#039;codebase&#039;, &#039;dynsrc&#039;, &#039;lowsrc&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can &#039;Black List&#039; (disallow) additional tags and attributes by adding to the Filter tags and Filter attributes fields, separating each tag or attribute name with a space or comma. If you select a Filter Type of &amp;quot;Black List&amp;quot;, this list will always be used, plus any additional tags and attributes you add.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====White List Filters=====&lt;br /&gt;
White list filters allow you to specify that a given group can only use a specific list of HTML tags and attributes. You can &#039;White List&#039; (allow) tags and attributes by adding to the Filter tags and Filter attributes fields for the desired group, separating each tag or attribute name with a space or comma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====No HTML Filters=====&lt;br /&gt;
No HTML filters are the strictest set of filters you can apply. Groups that are set to No HTML will not have permission to use any HTML.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====No Filtering=====&lt;br /&gt;
No filtering is the most permissive set of filters you can apply. Groups that are set to No Filtering will have permission to use any and all tags and attributes, including the default blacklisted tags and attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Combining Filters====&lt;br /&gt;
If a user belongs to two different groups that have different filter settings, filters will combine in a permissive way. That is, the set of tags the user will be permitted to use will the combination of the tags that each group allows the user to use. So if the user is a member of one group that white lists a specific set of tags and another group that white lists a different set of tags, the user will be able to use both sets of white listed tags. White lists override blacklists, so if a user belongs to one group that black lists a tag and another group that white lists a tag, the user will be able to use that tag. A user that belongs to a group that has no filtering will be able to use any HTML regardless of filtering settings for other groups the user belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Filter Application====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that these settings work regardless of the editor that you are using.  Even if you are using a WYSIWYG editor, the filtering settings may strip additional tags and attributes prior to saving information in the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Filter Examples====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example One:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To allow people in a group to only submit content with basic HTML tags, use the following settings:&lt;br /&gt;
* Select White List as the Filter type&lt;br /&gt;
* Set the Filter tags to: p, b, i, em, br, a, ul, ol, li, img&lt;br /&gt;
* Set the Filter attributes to: href, target, src&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example Two:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To apply the default black-list filtering to a group, use the following settings:&lt;br /&gt;
* Select Black List as the Filter type.&lt;br /&gt;
* Leave the Filter Tags and Filter attributes fields empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Text_filters.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Developers Notes====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The filtering parameters in config.xml have the new parameter menu=&amp;quot;hide&amp;quot;.  This hides the filters from the Menu Item&#039;s Component pane as you do not want cascading overrides to occur at the menu item level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*In Joomla! versions prior to 1.5, there were separate processes for creating a Static Content Item and normal Content Items. Both processes are now done just by adding Articles. Normal Content Items are now just called Articles, and Static Content Items are now called Uncategorized Articles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To create a static content item, create a new Article in the same way as for normal content and assign it to the &#039;Uncategorized&#039; Section and Category. You can then use the Menu Item Type called Article Layout to show the Article in a page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Joomla! 1.5 changes the method you must use to create the &#039;Read more...&#039; link. When you are adding or editing an article, just press the &#039;Read more...&#039; button located at the bottom of the screen, next to Image and Pagebreak buttons. This inserts a &#039;Read more...&#039; break in the Article. The text before the break will display as the Intro Text, and the text after the break will display when the &#039;Read more...&#039; link is pressed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* To add or edit Articles: [[Help17:Content_Article_Manager_Edit|Article Manager - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To manage Categories: [[Help17:Components_Content_Categories|Category Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To manage Users: [[screen.users.15|User Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Article Manager|Content}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Newsfeeds_Feeds&amp;diff=66049</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Newsfeeds Feeds</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Newsfeeds_Feeds&amp;diff=66049"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:04:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Components &amp;amp;rarr; News Feeds &amp;amp;rarr; Feeds&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu on the back-end of your Joomla! installation, or select the &amp;quot;Feeds&amp;quot; link from the [[Help16:Components_Newsfeeds_Categories|News Feeds Manager - Categories]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The News Feed Manager screen allows you to add News Feeds from other sites to your Joomla! site. You can add links to these feeds for users by creating News Feed layouts in [[Help16:Components_Newsfeeds_Feeds_Edit|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-Components-Newsfeeds-Feeds-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column&#039;s value.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Checkbox}} &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;. The name or title of the feed. Make it as descriptive as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Published}} &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Category.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Category to which this News Feed belongs. See [[Help16:Components_Newsfeeds_Categories_Edit|Category Manager - Edit (News Feeds)]]. Note that News Feed Categories are separate from other Categories, such as those for Articles, Banners, Contact, and Web Links.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader:Ordering}} &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Access&#039;&#039;&#039; The [[Help16:Users_Access_Levels| Access Level]] assigned to the feed. &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Feed Count&#039;&#039;&#039; The number of articles included in the feed.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Cache Time&#039;&#039;&#039;. The number of seconds for which to cache the feed locally.  It can safely be left at the default.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; The language of the feed.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the following toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-content-article_manager-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are:&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|New}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Edit}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Publish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Unpublish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Archive}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Checkin}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Trash}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; Open the configuration window. This window allows you to set default parameters for feeds. &lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Options==&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Options button to open the News Feed Manager Options window. This window allows you to set default parameters for News Feeds, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:J16newsfeedsmanageroptionsscreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Newsfeed=== &lt;br /&gt;
This tab has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Feed Layout:&#039;&#039;&#039; Allows users to set the specific content layout for newsfeed items.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Feed Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Feed Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Feed Content:&#039;&#039;&#039; Allows the user to show or hide the content in the newsfeed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Characters Count:&#039;&#039;&#039; Allows users to define how many text characters are shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J16newsfeedmanagercategoryoptionscreenshot.png|Newsfeed Manager Options Category Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Choose a Layout:&#039;&#039;&#039; Allows users to set the default content item layout for newsfeed articles.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Category Title:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Can Show or Hide the Category Title for the newsfeed items.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Category Description:&#039;&#039;&#039; Can Show or Hide the Category Description for newsfeed items.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Category Image:&#039;&#039;&#039; Can Show or Hide the Category Image for the newsfeed items.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Subcategory Levels:&#039;&#039;&#039; Can set how many sub-category levels will be displayed in the newsfeed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Empty Categories:&#039;&#039;&#039; Can Show or Hide empty categories (categories with no active articles in them).&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Subcategories Descriptions:&#039;&#039;&#039; Can Show or Hide the Description for Subcategories in the newsfeed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;# of Feeds in Category:&#039;&#039;&#039; Can Show or Hide the number of categories in the newsfeed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE:&#039;&#039;These options can be modified on a per-menu-item basis.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Categories===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J16newsfeedmanagercategoriesoptionscreenshot.png|Newsfeed Manager Options Categories Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Top Level Category Desctription:&#039;&#039;&#039; Can Show or Hide the description for the top level category shown in the newsfeed.  This may be changed in the menu item configuration window for specific menu items.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Subcategory Levels:&#039;&#039;&#039; Can determine how many subcategory levels to display.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Empty Categories:&#039;&#039;&#039; Can Show or Hide Empty Categories. (Categories with no active content articles in them)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Subcategories Descriptions:&#039;&#039;&#039; Can Show or Hide Subcategory Descriptions.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;# of Feeds in Category:&#039;&#039;&#039; Can show or Hide the number of newsfeeds in each category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: &#039;&#039;These options may be changed on a per-menu-item basis.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===List Layouts===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J16newsfeedmanagerlistlayoutsoptionscreenshot.png|Newsfeed Manager Options List Layouts Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following options are available for this tab:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Display Select:&#039;&#039;&#039; Can Show or Hide the &#039;&#039;Sleect&#039;&#039; dropdown listbox.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Table Headings:&#039;&#039;&#039; Can Show or Hide the headings in list layouts.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;# Articles:&#039;&#039;&#039; Can Show or Hide the number of articles in each newsfeed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Feed Links:&#039;&#039;&#039; Can Show or Hide a link to each feed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pagination:&#039;&#039;&#039; Can Show or Hide Pagination Options.  Pagination allows additional content to be displayed on subsequent pages.  This may be useful if your content will not easily fit on one page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pagination Results:&#039;&#039;&#039; Can show the number of pages of newsfeed content.  This option is only viewed if the Pagination option is turned on.  An example would be &#039;&#039;Page 1 of 4&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: &#039;&#039; These options may be changed on a per-menu-item basis&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Permissions===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J16newsfeedmanagerpermissionsoptionscreenshot.png|Newsfeed Component Options Permissions Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab Allows Administrators to set permissions for user access levels to the Newsfeed Component.&lt;br /&gt;
For each User Group Administrators can set permissions for the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Configure:&#039;&#039;&#039;Allows users in this usergroup to edit and configure the Newsfeed component.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Component:&#039;&#039;&#039; Allows users in this usergroup access the Newsfeed component.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create:&#039;&#039;&#039; Allows users in this usergroup to create content in the Newsfeed component.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Delete:&#039;&#039;&#039; Allows users in this usergroup to delete content in the Newsfeed component.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit:&#039;&#039;&#039; Allows users in this usergroup to edit content in the Newsfeed component.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit State:&#039;&#039;&#039; Allows users in this usergroup to edit the state of content in the Newsfeed component. (e.g. &#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Own:&#039;&#039;&#039; Allows users in this usergroup to edit content they have created in the Newsfeed component.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==List Filters==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Partial Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can filter the list of items either by typing part of the title or the ID number. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-extension_manager-manage-filter-name.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a large number of items on the list, you can use this filter to find the desired item(s) quickly. Enter either part of the title or an ID number and press &#039;Search&#039; to display the matching items. You can type whole words or part of a word. For example, &amp;quot;ooml&amp;quot; will match all titles with the word &amp;quot;Joomla!&amp;quot; in them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by State, Category, Access, and Language&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the upper right area, above the column headings, there are 4 drop-down list boxes as shown below: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J16newsfeedfilterlistsscreenshot.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The selections may be combined. Only items matching both selections will display in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select State}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select Category}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Access.&#039;&#039;&#039; Use the drop-down list box to select the access level.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Language.&#039;&#039;&#039; Use the drop-down list box to select the language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*You need to add at least one Category for news feeds &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; you add the first feed. Categories are added using the [[Screen.categories.15|Category Manager]] by clicking on &#039;News Feeds&#039;, and then on &#039;Categories&#039; in the &#039;Components&#039; menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To create or Edit News Feeds: [[Help16:Components_Newsfeeds_Feeds_Edit|News Feeds Manager - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To work with News Feed Categories: [[Help16:Components_Newsfeeds_Categories|Category Manager (News Feeds)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Messaging_Write&amp;diff=66048</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Messaging Write</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Messaging_Write&amp;diff=66048"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:02:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Components &amp;amp;rarr; Messaging &amp;amp;rarr; Read Private Messages&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu on the back-end of your Joomla! installation, or click the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon in the toolbar of the [[Help16:Components_Messaging_Inbox|Read Private Messages]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen lets you write and send private messages to others with the correct [[Help16:Users_Groups|User Group]] permissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16_Components_Messaging_Write.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Details==&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Recipient.&#039;&#039;&#039; The recipient of the message. Click on the &amp;quot;Change User&amp;quot; button to open the pop-up, and then, from the list of names, select the user to whom you wish to send the message.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Subject.&#039;&#039;&#039; The subject of the message. Just like the subject of an email, it helps if this is a short description of the message body.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Message.&#039;&#039;&#039; The body text of the message. Just like the body text of an email, it helps if the message is meaningful and kept relatively short.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16_Components_Messaging_Write_Toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Send.&#039;&#039;&#039; Sends the message. Note that the Recipient, Subject and Message fields cannot be blank.&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Cancel}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*Further information about Inbox messages: [[Help16:Components_Messaging_Inbox|Private messages - Inbox]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Further information about Reading messages: [[Help16:Components_Messaging_Read|Private messages - Read]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Messaging_Read&amp;diff=66047</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Messaging Read</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Messaging_Read&amp;diff=66047"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:02:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Components &amp;amp;rarr; Messaging &amp;amp;rarr; Read Private Messages&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu on the Back-end of your Joomla! 1.6.x installation. Next, click on a Subject hyperlink to open the &amp;quot;View Message&amp;quot; screen. Alternatively, you may select [[Image:Help16_Components_Messaging_Read_MyMessages.png]] at the top of the Administrative pages to find a message to read.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows you to view and reply to a single private message only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16_Components_Messaging_Read.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Details==&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;From.&#039;&#039;&#039; The sender of the message.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Posted.&#039;&#039;&#039; The date and time the message was sent.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Subject.&#039;&#039;&#039; The subject of the message.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Message.&#039;&#039;&#039; The body of the message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16_Components_Messaging_Read_Toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Reply.&#039;&#039;&#039; Creates a new message as a reply to the message.&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Cancel}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*Only users who are members of the &amp;quot;Super Users&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Administrator&amp;quot; groups have access to this screen, unless [[Help16:Users_Groups|User Group]] permissions have been altered for this component via Options at the [[Help16:Components_Messaging_Inbox|Private Messages - Inbox]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*Further information about Inbox messages: [[Help16:Components_Messaging_Inbox|Private Messages - Inbox]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Further information about writing messages: [[Help16:Components_Messaging_Write|Private Messages - Write]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Messaging_Inbox&amp;diff=66046</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Messaging Inbox</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Messaging_Inbox&amp;diff=66046"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:02:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Components &amp;amp;rarr; Messaging &amp;amp;rarr; Read Private Messages&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu on the Back-end of your Joomla! 1.6.x installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Private Messaging screen allows you to send messages to other Back-end Joomla! users. You may read, write, send, and delete messages here. In addition, you may also manage message settings and grouping options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J16messagescreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Checkbox.&#039;&#039;&#039; The item selection checkbox. Check this box to select one or more items. To select all items, check the box in the column heading. After one or more boxes are checked, click a toolbar button to take an action on the selected item or items. Many toolbar actions, such as Mark As Read, Mark As Unread and Trash, can work with multiple items.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Subject.&#039;&#039;&#039; The subject line of the message. Click this to open the message for viewing. This takes you to the [[Help16:Components_Messaging_Read|View Message]] screen where you view, reply to, or delete the message.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Read.&#039;&#039;&#039; A green tick indicates that the message has been read. A red donut indicates that it has not been read.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;From.&#039;&#039;&#039; The user who sent the message.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Date.&#039;&#039;&#039; The date and time the message was sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J16messagingtoolbarshot.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;New.&#039;&#039;&#039; Creates a new message to be sent. A window called [[Help16:Components_Messaging_Write|Write Private Message]] will open.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Mark As Read.&#039;&#039;&#039; Marks the selected messages as Read.  Select messages by checking the message&#039;s checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Mark As Unread.&#039;&#039;&#039; Marks the selected messages as Unread.  Select messages by checking the message&#039;s checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Trash.&#039;&#039;&#039; Deletes the selected messages.  Select messages by checking the message&#039;s checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;My Settings.&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens a pop-up window that allows you to change messaging settings.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens a pop-up window that allows you to manage [[Help16:Users_Groups|User Groups]] for this component.&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==List Filters==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Partial Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can filter the list of messages by typing part of the subject, or you can select Read, Unread or Trash messages.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Search.&#039;&#039;&#039; In the upper left corner just above the column headings is a Search field and two buttons, as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16_Components_Messaging_Inbox_Filter.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a large number of messages on the list, you can use this filter to find the desired messages quickly. Enter part of the subject and press &amp;quot;Search&amp;quot; to display the matching messages. You can enter in whole words or part of a word. For example, &amp;quot;ooml&amp;quot; will match all subjects with the word &amp;quot;Joomla!&amp;quot; in them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Read, Unread or Trash State&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the upper right area, above the column headings, is a drop-down list box as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16_Components_Messaging_Inbox_State.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select State.&#039;&#039;&#039; Use the drop-down list box to select: Read, Unread or Trash. Only messages with this state will show on the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Only users who are members of the &amp;quot;Super Users&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Administrator&amp;quot; groups have access to this screen, unless [[Help16:Users_Groups|User Group]] permissions have been altered for this component via Options on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
*You are able to restore Messages previously sent to the Trash by finding the Select State filter drop-down and selecting &amp;quot;Trash&amp;quot; from the list. Finally, to restore the message, simply select the messages you want to restore using the checkbox next to the particular message you require and click the &amp;quot;Mark As Unread&amp;quot; button in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Further information about writing messages: [[Help16:Components_Messaging_Write|Private messages - Write]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Further information about reading messages: [[Help16:Components_Messaging_Read|Private messages - Read]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Weblinks_Links_Edit&amp;diff=66045</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Weblinks Links Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Weblinks_Links_Edit&amp;diff=66045"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:02:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen lets you create new Web Links and edit existing ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to the [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Links|Web Links Manager]]. To add a new Web Link, click the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon in the toolbar. To edit an existing Web Link, click the Web Link&#039;s Title, or check the Web Link&#039;s checkbox and press the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; icon in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you add a new Web Link or edit an existing one. Note that you need to create at least one [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Categories_Edit|Web Links Category]] before you can create your first Web Link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-links-new_edit-screen.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Edit Web Link===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you enter or edit basic link information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;. The Title of the Web Link. This field is required.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Alias}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;URL&#039;&#039;&#039;. The URL of the Web Link.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|StateWithReported}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Category.&#039;&#039;&#039; Category for this Web Link. Select from the drop-down list box of [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Categories|Web Links Categories]]. Note that Web Links Categories are separate from other Categories, such as those for Articles, Contacts, Banners, and News Feeds.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indicates the order of this Web Link in the Web Link Manager. The default Order is to add the item to the end of the list. To select a different position, use the drop-down list box. This item will be moved to the position just after the item selected from the drop-down list. Note that the Order in which the Web Links are displayed can also be changed in the [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Links|Web Links Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Access}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Language}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|ID}} &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter an optional description to display below the Web Link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Publishing Options===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:PublishingOptions|CreatedBy}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:PublishingOptions|Alias}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:PublishingOptions|Created}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:PublishingOptions|PublishStart}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:PublishingOptions|PublishFinish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:PublishingOptions|Modified}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Basic Options===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-links-new_edit-options.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_weblinks_target|type=ItemOptions}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_weblinks_count_clicks}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-links-new_edit-toolbar.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Save}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|SaveAndClose}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|SaveAndNew}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|SaveAsCopy}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Close}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* At least one Web Link Category must be added &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; any Web Links can be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To add or edit Web Link Categories: [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Categories|Web Link Category Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To find and edit existing Web Links: [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Links|Web Link Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To create a page layout for Web Links: [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Item_Manager_Edit#Internal_Link_-_Web_Links|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit - Internal Link - Web Links]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Web Link Manager|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Weblinks_Links&amp;diff=66044</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Weblinks Links</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Weblinks_Links&amp;diff=66044"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:02:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
The Web Links Manager allows you to manage links to other web sites and organize them into categories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Components &amp;amp;rarr; Weblinks &amp;amp;rarr; Links&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu of the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Joomla! Administrator Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;, or select the &amp;quot;Links&amp;quot; link on the [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Categories|Web Links Category Manager]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Web Links Manager allows you to [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Links_Edit|add]], [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Links_Edit|edit]] and remove links to other web sites on your Joomla! web site, and organize them into [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Categories|categories]]. You can then [[#Displaying Links on your Site|display these links on your site]], and optionally [[#Letting Visitors Submit Links|let visitors add new links]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-links-screen.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Column Headers===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Checkbox}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Published}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Category}} See [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Categories_Edit|Web Links Category Manager - Edit]].&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Access}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Hits}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===List Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Filter by Partial Title====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can filter the list of items by typing in part of the Title or the ID number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Filter}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Filter by State, Category, Access and Language====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the upper right area, above the column headings, are 4 drop-down list boxes as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-links-list_options.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The selections may be combined. Only items matching all selections will be displayed in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Select State}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Select Category}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Select Access}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Select Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Number of Items to Display====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below the list you&#039;ll find:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_list_Display_Count}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-links-toolbar.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|New}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Edit}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Publish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Unpublish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Archive}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Checkin}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Trash}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Options}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;quot;Web Links&amp;quot; / &amp;quot;Categories&amp;quot; Links==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top left, above the Filter, you will see two links as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-links-links.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Links&#039;&#039;&#039;. This link is disabled, since we are already in the Web Links page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Categories&#039;&#039;&#039;. Click this link to go to the [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Categories|Web Links Category Manager]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Options==&lt;br /&gt;
Click the Options button to open the &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Links Manager Options&#039;&#039;&#039; window which lets you configure this component.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Many of the options specified here can be overridden for each [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Item_Weblink_Categories|List All Web Link Categories]] and [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Item_Weblink_Category|List Web Links in a Category]] menu items or in [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Links_Edit|each individual Web Link item]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Save / Cancel===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:buttons|OptionsSave}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:buttons|OptionsCancel}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Weblink Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
The first tab, shown below, contains display options for Weblinks in front-end pages that are displayed by Web Links menu items:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-links-options-weblink.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_weblinks_target|type=ComponentOptions}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_weblinks_count_clicks}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Icon.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Icon to be displayed to the left of the Web Links URL. Select an image file from the drop-down list box. The images are listed from the &#039;images/M_images&#039; folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply to menu items of type [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Item_Weblink_Categories|List All Web Link Categories]] and [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Item_Weblink_Category|List Web Links in a Category]], unless they are overridden in the menu item&#039;s &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039; options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-links-options-category.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Category|CatTitle}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Category|CatDesc}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Category|CatImage}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Category|SubcatLevels}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Category|EmptyCat}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Category|SubcatDesc}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;# Web links&#039;&#039;&#039;. Hide or Show the number of Web Links in each category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Categories Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply to menu items of type [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Item_Weblink_Categories|List All Web Link Categories]], unless they are overridden in the menu item&#039;s &#039;&#039;Categories&#039;&#039; options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-links-options-categories.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Categories|TopLevelCatDesc}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Categories|SubcatLevels}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Categories|EmptyCat}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Categories|SubcatDesc}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;# Web links&#039;&#039;&#039;. Hide or Show the number of Web Links in each category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===List Layouts Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-links-options-list_layouts.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|ListLayouts|DisplaySelect}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|ListLayouts|TableHeadings}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Links description&#039;&#039;&#039;. Hide or Show the Link Description for each Web Link.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Hits&#039;&#039;&#039;. Hide or Show the number of hits for each Web Link.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|ListLayouts|Pagination}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|ListLayouts|PaginationResults}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Integration Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-links-options-integration.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Integration|ShowFeedLink}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Integration|FeedItemShow}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Permissions Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_all_with_image|help16-components-weblinks-links-options-permissions.png}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displaying Links on your Site==&lt;br /&gt;
One way of displaying links on your site is to use the [[Help16:Extensions_Module_Manager_Weblinks|Weblinks module]] to list links from a specific category. Another method is to create a menu item of type [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Item_Weblink_Categories|Weblinks - List All Web Link Categories]] or [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Item_Weblink_Category|Weblinks - List Web Links in a Category]] to have a page display all [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Categories|Web Links categories]], or all links within one [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Categories|Web Links category]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Letting Visitors Submit Links==&lt;br /&gt;
You might also wish to let visitors submit new Web Links. To do so, simply add a [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Item_Weblink_Submit|Submit a Web Link]] menu item to one of your menus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*You need to add at least one Category for Web Links &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; you can add your first Web Link. Categories are added using the [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Categories|Web Link Category Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To add or edit Web Links: [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Links_Edit|Web Link Manager - New/Edit]].&lt;br /&gt;
*To work with Web Links Categories: [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Categories|Web Link Category Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Web Links-related menu items: [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Item_Weblink_Categories|List All Web Link Categories]], [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Item_Weblink_Category|List Web Links in a Category]], [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Item_Weblink_Submit|Submit a Web Link]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Weblinks module: [[Help16:Extensions_Module_Manager_Weblinks|Weblinks module]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Web Link Manager|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Weblinks_Categories_Edit&amp;diff=66043</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Weblinks Categories Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Weblinks_Categories_Edit&amp;diff=66043"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:01:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to the [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Categories|Web Link Category Manager]]. To add a new Web Link Category, and click the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon in the toolbar. To edit an existing Web Link Category, click the Category&#039;s Name, or check the Category&#039;s checkbox and press the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; icon in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can add a new Web Link Category or edit an existing one. Note that you need to create at least one Web Link Category before you can create a Web Link. Also, Web Link Categories are separate from other types of Categories, such as those for Articles, Banners, and News Feeds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-categories-new_edit-screen.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Alias}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Parent}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|State}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Access}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Permissions_SetPermissions}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|ID}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|CategoryDescription}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Publishing Options===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:PublishingOptions|CreatedBy}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:PublishingOptions|CreatedDate}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:PublishingOptions|ModifiedBy}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:PublishingOptions|ModifiedDate}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Basic Options===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-categories-new_edit-basic_options.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|AlternativeLayout}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Note}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Options===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-categories-new_edit-metadata.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:metadata|Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:metadata|Keywords}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:metadata|Author}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:metadata|Robots}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category Permissions===&lt;br /&gt;
This section is where you can view and edit permissions for items that are part of this category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-categories-new_edit-category_permissions.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tree on the left represents the user groups that have been defined for your Joomla! site, while the right part displays permissions for the currently selected group, and lets you edit those permissions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_columns_action}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_columns_select_new_setting}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_columns_calculated_setting}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-categories-new_edit-toolbar.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Save}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|SaveAndClose}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|SaveAndNew}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|SaveAsCopy}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Close}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To work with Web Links: [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Links|Web Link Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To work with Web Links Categories: [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Categories|Web Link Category Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Web Link Manager|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Weblinks_Categories&amp;diff=66042</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Weblinks Categories</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Weblinks_Categories&amp;diff=66042"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:01:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
The Web Links Category Manager allows you to manage categories that can be used to classify Web Links.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Components &amp;amp;rarr; Weblinks &amp;amp;rarr; Categories&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu of the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Joomla! Administrator Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;, or select the &amp;quot;Categories&amp;quot; link on the [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Links|Web Links Manager]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Web Links Category Manager is where you can [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Categories_Edit|edit]] existing Web Links Categories and [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Categories_Edit|create new ones]]. Note that Web Links Categories are separate from other Categories, such as Categories for Articles, Banners, News Feeds, and Contacts. From this screen, you can also navigate to the [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Links|Web Links Manager]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-categories-screen.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Column Headers===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column&#039;s value.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Checkbox}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Published}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Ordering}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Access}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===List Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Filter by Partial Title====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Filter}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Filter by Max Levels, State, Access and Language ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the upper right area, above the column headings, are 3 drop-down list boxes as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-categories-list_options.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selections may be combined. Only items matching all selections will be displayed in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Select Max Levels}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Select State}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Select Access}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Select Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Number of Items to Display====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below the list you&#039;ll find:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_list_Display_Count}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Batch process the selected categories===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:BatchProcess_Categories}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-categories-toolbar.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|New}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Edit}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Publish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Unpublish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Archive}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Checkin}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Trash}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Rebuild}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Options}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;quot;Web Links&amp;quot; / &amp;quot;Categories&amp;quot; Links==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top left, above the Filter, you will see two links as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-components-weblinks-categories-links.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Links.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press this link to go to the [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Links|Web Links Manager]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Categories&#039;&#039;&#039; This link is disabled, since we are already in the Categories page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Options==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Links#Options|Weblinks Component&#039;s Options]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Web Links: [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Links|Web Links Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To add new Web Links Categories: [[Help16:Components_Weblinks_Categories_Edit|Web Links Category Manager - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Web Links Manager|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Search&amp;diff=66041</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Search</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Search&amp;diff=66041"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:00:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Search Manager: Search Term Analysis&#039;&#039;&#039; back-end screen allows you to view statistics about searches performed by visitors of your site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: By default, statistics functionality is disabled after installing Joomla! -- refer to [[#Options|Options]] for information on enabling statistics.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Components &amp;amp;rarr; Search&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu of the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Joomla! Administrator Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Search Statistics screen allows you to see how many searches were done for each keyword combination and how many results were returned for each search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-admin-components-search-screen.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Column Headers===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Search Phrase&#039;&#039;&#039;. The search text entered by the user.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Hits&#039;&#039;&#039;. The number of times users searched for this phrase.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Results&#039;&#039;&#039;. The number of search results returned to the user for this search text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can click the &#039;Search Phrase&#039; or &#039;Hits&#039; column headers to sort the list by these values. Click again to sort in the reverse order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===List Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
====Filtering by Partial Search Phrase====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Filter}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Statistics Status, Showing/Hiding Results Count====&lt;br /&gt;
In the upper right corner there are more fields, as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-admin-components-search-screen-status_and_results_toggle.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Gathering statistics enabled / Gathering statistics disabled&#039;&#039;&#039;. If the options parameter called &amp;quot;Gather Search Statistics&amp;quot; is set to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;, this will display as &amp;quot;Enabled&amp;quot;. Otherwise, it will display as &amp;quot;Disabled&amp;quot;. See [[#Options|Options]] for information on enabling and disabling statistics.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Search Results / Hide Search Results&#039;&#039;&#039;. Toggle this link to show or hide the &amp;quot;Results&amp;quot; column values.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Number of Items to Display====&lt;br /&gt;
Below the list you&#039;ll find:&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_list_Display_Count}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-admin-components-search-toolbar.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Reset.&#039;&#039;&#039; Resets the search log to it&#039;s initial, empty state. &#039;&#039;Warning: This will erase all prior search statistics information.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Options}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Options==&lt;br /&gt;
In the toolbar, click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button to open the Search Manager Options window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Save / Cancel===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:buttons|OptionsSave}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:buttons|OptionsCancel}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Component Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
In this window, the &amp;quot;Component&amp;quot; tab allows you to set various parameters for Search Statistics, as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-admin-components-search-options-component.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Gather Search Statistics&#039;&#039;&#039;. Whether or not to gather search statistics for the web site. If set to &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;, no information will be collected from users searches. This means that no information will be displayed in the Search Statistics screen. This is set to &amp;quot;No&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Use Search Areas&#039;&#039;&#039;. Whether or not to show the search areas checkboxes in the front-end search options, so user can choose what kind of items to search. This is set to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; by default. Can be overridden in the [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Item_Search_Results|List Search Results]] menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Creation Date&#039;&#039;&#039;. Whether or not to show the Creation Date for items that are displayed in search results in the front-end. This is set to &amp;quot;Show&amp;quot; by default. Can be overridden in the [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Item_Search_Results|List Search Results]] menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Permissions Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_intro}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-admin-components-search-options-permissions.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_columns_intro}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_columns_admin}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_columns_manage}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_conclusion}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*This screen does not enable or disable searching of the web site. Searching is enabled either by adding an [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Item_Manager_Edit#Internal_Link_-_Search|Internal Link - Search Menu Item]] or by adding a [[Help16:Extensions_Module_Manager_Site_New#Search|Search Module]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Search statistics are disabled by default. If you&#039;re interested in knowing what your visitors search for and what they find, you&#039;ll need to enable search statistics. Refer to [[#Options|Options]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To add a Search Menu Item: [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Item_Manager_Edit#Internal_Link_-_Search|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit - Internal Link - Search]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To add a Search Module: [[Screen.modulessite.edit.15#Search|Modules Site - Search]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Search Statistics|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Newsfeeds_Feeds_Edit&amp;diff=66040</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Newsfeeds Feeds Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Newsfeeds_Feeds_Edit&amp;diff=66040"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T13:00:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to the the [[Help16:Components_Newsfeeds_Feeds|News Feed Manager]]. To add a new News Feed, click the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon in the toolbar. To edit an existing News Feed, click the News Feed&#039;s name, or check the news Feed&#039;s checkbox and press the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; icon in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you add a new News Feed or edit an existing one. Note that you need to create at least one [[Help16:Components_Newsfeeds_Categories|News Feed Category]] before you can create your first News Feed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J16newsfeedscomponentaddeditscreenshot.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Details==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Name of the News Feed. This field is required.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Link.&#039;&#039;&#039; The link of this News Feed. This should normally begin with &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;quot;http://&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Category.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Category for this News Feed. Select from the drop-down list box of News Feed Categories. Note that News Feed Categories are separate from other Categories, such as those for Articles, Contacts, Banners, and Web Links.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Alias}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;State.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select from the drop-down box: Published, Unpublished, Archived, or Trashed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Access.&#039;&#039;&#039; The access level needed to view the link.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Order.&#039;&#039;&#039; The order of this News Feed in the list of News Feeds. The default order is to add the item to the end of the list. To select a different position, use the drop-down list box. This item will moved to the position just after the item selected from the drop-down list. Note that the order in which the News Feeds are displayed can also be changed in the [[Help16:Components_Newsfeeds_Feeds|News Feed Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Language.&#039;&#039;&#039; The language of the selected feed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;ID.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Joomla! assigned ID of the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Help16:Publishing-Options}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Help16:Display-Options}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Help16:Metadata}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Help16:Edit-Toolbar|Edit Toolbar}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*A News Feed category must be added &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; any News Feed can be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To add or edit News Feed Categories: [[Help16:Components_Newsfeeds_Categories|News Feed Category Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Newsfeeds_Categories_Edit&amp;diff=66039</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Newsfeeds Categories Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Newsfeeds_Categories_Edit&amp;diff=66039"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T11:14:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Components &amp;amp;rarr; News Feeds &amp;amp;rarr; Categories&#039;&#039;&#039;. Once at the [[Help16:Components_Newsfeeds_Categories|News Feeds Category Manager]], either select the feed category and click the edit icon on the toolbar, click the name of the category, or click on the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The New/Edit page for the News Feeds Category Manager is a create/edit screen that allows website administrators to create or edit News Feed Categories. Categories allow a broken down structure of News Feeds. &#039;&#039;You must have at least one category before you can create any News Feeds!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-Components-Newsfeed-Categories-Edit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Details==&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Alias}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;. A short note about the category.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent&#039;&#039;&#039;. The parent category if any.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;State.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select from the dropdown box: Published, Unpublished, Archived, or Trashed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Access.&#039;&#039;&#039; The access level needed to view the link.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Language.&#039;&#039;&#039; The language of the selected category.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;ID.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Joomla! assigned ID of the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Help16:Basic-Options}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Help16:Category-Access-Rules}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Help16:Metadata-Options}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-components-weblinks-links-new_edit-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are: &lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Save}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close.&#039;&#039;&#039; Saves the item and closes the edit screen.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New.&#039;&#039;&#039; Saves the current item and goes directly to the New item page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy.&#039;&#039;&#039; Saves the current item as a new item. This button is available only when editing an existing item, not when creating a new one.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Close.&#039;&#039;&#039; Return to the previous screen without saving your work. If you press Close while adding a new item, this new item will not be created. If you were modifying an existing item, the modifications will not be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*You must create at least one News Feed Category before you can create any News Feeds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To work with News Feeds: [[Help16:Components_Newsfeeds_Feeds|News Feeds Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Newsfeeds_Categories&amp;diff=66038</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Newsfeeds Categories</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Newsfeeds_Categories&amp;diff=66038"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T11:13:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Components &amp;amp;rarr; News Feeds &amp;amp;rarr; Categories&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu in the back-end of your Joomla! installation. You can also select the &#039;Categories&#039; tab in the [[Help16:Components_Newsfeeds_Feeds|News Feed Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
News Feed Categories allow you to categorize different website feeds entering your site for better organization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-Components-Newsfeed-Category-Manager.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column&#039;s value.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Checkbox}} &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; The name or title of the feed. Make it as descriptive as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Published}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader:Ordering}} &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Access.&#039;&#039;&#039; This column shows the [[Help16:Users_Access_Levels| Access Level]] assigned to the news feed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Language.&#039;&#039;&#039; The language used for this feed category.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the following toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-components-weblinks-categories-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are:&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|New}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Edit}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Publish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Unpublish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Archive}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Checkin}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Trash}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Rebuild&#039;&#039;&#039; Rebuilds the Category Tree data.&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==List Filters==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Partial Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can filter the list of items either by typing part of the title or the ID number. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-extension_manager-manage-filter-name.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a large number of items on the list, you can use this filter to find the desired item(s) quickly. Enter either part of the title or an ID number and press &#039;Search&#039; to display the matching items. You can enter in whole words or part of a word. For example, &amp;quot;ooml&amp;quot; will match all titles with the word &amp;quot;Joomla!&amp;quot; in them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Access, State, and Language&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the upper right area, above the column headings, there are 4 drop-down list boxes as shown below: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-Components-Newsfeed-Categories-Filter.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The selections may be combined. Only items matching both selections will display in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Access.&#039;&#039;&#039; Use the drop-down list box to select the access level.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select State}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Language.&#039;&#039;&#039; Use the drop-down list box to select the language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with News Feeds: [[Help16:Components_Newsfeeds_Feeds|News Feed Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To add new News Feeds Categories: [[Help16:Components_Newsfeeds_Categories_Edit|News Feeds Category Manager - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Content_Categories_Edit&amp;diff=66037</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Content Categories Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Content_Categories_Edit&amp;diff=66037"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T11:12:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to the [[screen.contentcategories.15|Category Manager]]. To add a new Category, press the &#039;New&#039; icon in the toolbar. To edit an existing Category, click on the Category title or click the Category&#039;s checkbox and then click on the Edit icon in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can add a new Category to a Section or edit an existing Category. Categories are used to organize the Articles within a Section. Sections and Categories allow you to display related Articles together on a page and to filter Articles in the Article Manager. All Articles are assigned either to a Category that you create or to the special Category called &#039;Uncategorized&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:content_category_edit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Details==&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Alias}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Published}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Section.&#039;&#039;&#039; Section for this Category. Select the Section from the drop-down list box. This is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Category Order.&#039;&#039;&#039; The order this Category will display in the [[screen.contentcategories.15|Category Manager]]. Use the drop-down list box to change the Order. You can select &#039;First&#039; or &#039;Last&#039; to make this the first or last Category. You can also select a Category from the list. In this case, the current Category will be listed just after the Category you select. Note that the Order can also be changed in the [[screen.contentcategories.15|Category Manager]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Access Level}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image Position}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==TinyMCE editor==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk:TinyMCE}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==No editor==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk:No editor}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Image Button==&lt;br /&gt;
An Image button is located just below the edit window, as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Image_button.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk17:toolbaricon|Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
In the upper right you will see the toolbar: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:section_edit_toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are: &lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Save}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Apply}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Close}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To work with existing Categories: [[Help17:Components_Content_Categories|Category Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To work with Articles: [[Help17:Content_Article_Manager|Article Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To create a page showing Articles for a Category in a Blog layout: [[screen.menus.edit.15#Category Blog Layout|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit - Category Blog Layout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To create a page showing Articles for a Category in a List layout: [[screen.menus.edit.15#Category List Layout|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit - Category List Layout]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Category Management|Content}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Content_Categories&amp;diff=66036</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Content Categories</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Content_Categories&amp;diff=66036"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T11:12:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Content &amp;amp;rarr; Category Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu on the back-end of your Joomla! installation. Or click on the &amp;quot;Category Manager&amp;quot; icon in the [[screen.cpanel.15|Control Panel]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Category Manager is where you can edit existing Categories and create new ones. Articles in Joomla! are organized into Sections and Categories. Categories are the second level of organization underneath Sections. Every Section contains one or more Categories. The special Section &#039;Uncategorized&#039; has a special Category also called &#039;Uncategorized&#039;. These are built into Joomla!.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help17-content-category manager-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column&#039;s value.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Checkbox}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk17:colheader|Status}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Access}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the following toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help17-content-category manager-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are:&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|New}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Edit}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Publish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Unpublish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Archive}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Checkin}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Trash}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Rebuild}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Options}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==List Filters==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Partial Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can filter the list of items either by entering in part of the title or the ID number. Or you can select a combination of Section, Category, Author, and Published State.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|1.6 List Filter}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Max Levels, Status, Access, Language&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
In the upper right area, above the column headings, are 4 drop-down list boxes as shown below:[[Image:Help17-content-category_manager-filter.png|center]] The selections may be combined. Only items matching all selections will display in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Max Levels.&#039;&#039;&#039; Use the drop-down list box to select the number of levels to display within the structure.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select State}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Access.&#039;&#039;&#039; Use the drop-down list box to select the desired Access.  Only items with this level of Access will display.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Batch process the selected categories===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:BatchProcess_Categories}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*Click on the Title of a Category to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click on the green check mark or the red X in the Published column to toggle between Published and Unpublished.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click on the Column Headers to sort the Categories by that column. Click a second time to sort descending (Z to A).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To add or edit Categories: [[Help17:Components_Content_Categories_Edit|Category Manager - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To create a page showing Articles for a Category in a Blog layout: [[screen.menus.edit.15#Category Blog Layout|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit - Category Blog Layout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To create a page showing Articles for a Category in a List layout: [[screen.menus.edit.15#Category List Layout|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit - Category List Layout]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Category Management|Content}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Contacts_Contacts_Edit&amp;diff=66035</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Contacts Contacts Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Contacts_Contacts_Edit&amp;diff=66035"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T11:12:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen is accessed from the back-end Joomla! administrator panel. It is used to create or edit contacts in your Joomla! website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to the [[Help16:Components_Contacts_Contacts|Contact Manager]]. To add a new Contact, press the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon in the toolbar. To edit an existing Contact, click on the Contact&#039;s Name or click the Contact&#039;s checkbox and then click on the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; icon in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can add a Contact or edit an existing Contact. Contacts allow you to list people on your web site. They also allow users to send e-mails to those people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-contacts-manager-edit-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Details and Options==&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can enter information about the Contact, such as name, address, e-mail, and so on. The options allow you to control settings such as what information gets displayed for each Contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===New/Edit Contact===&lt;br /&gt;
This section will be labeled &#039;&#039;New Contact&#039;&#039; if you are creating a new contact. If you are editing an existing contact this section will be labeled &#039;&#039;Edit Contact&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Name.&#039;&#039;&#039; The full name of the Contact.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Alias}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Linked to User.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the User, if any, that this Contact is linked to from the drop-down list box. This allows you to link this Contact&#039;s information to a registered Joomla! User. If this Contact is not linked to a User, select &amp;quot;-No User-&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Category}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|State}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Access}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Featured.&#039;&#039;&#039; If marked yes, the item will be displayed in featured view.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Other Information.&#039;&#039;&#039; Other information about this Contact. No HTML is allowed in this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Publishing Options===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:PublishingOptions|CreatedBy}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Created By Alias.&#039;&#039;&#039; You can enter here an alias to be displayed instead of the name of the user who created the contact.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:PublishingOptions|Created}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:PublishingOptions|PublishStart}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:PublishingOptions|PublishFinish}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Contact Details===&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Image.&#039;&#039;&#039; Image to display for this Contact. Select an image file from the drop-down list box. This lists images in the &#039;images/stories&#039; folder. Images can be uploaded using the [[Help16:Content_Media_Manager|Media Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Contact&#039;s Position:&#039;&#039;&#039; The Contact&#039;s current position.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;E-mail.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Contact&#039;s e-mail address. Note that e-mail addresses in Joomla! can be protected from &amp;quot;spambots&amp;quot; by enabling &amp;quot;Content-Email Cloaking&amp;quot; in the [[Help16:Extensions_Plugin_Manager|Plug-in Manager]]. This is enabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Address.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Contact&#039;s street address.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;City or Suburb.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Contact&#039;s town or suburb.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;State or Province.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Contact&#039;s state or county.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Postal / ZIP Code.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Contact&#039;s postal code.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Country.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Contact&#039;s country.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Telephone.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Contact&#039;s phone number.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Mobile.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Contact&#039;s mobile phone number.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Fax.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Contact&#039;s fax number.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Website.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Contact&#039;s web site address.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;First Sort Field.&#039;&#039;&#039; The part of the name to use as the first sort field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Second Sort Field.&#039;&#039;&#039; The part of the name to use as the second sort field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Third Sort Field.&#039;&#039;&#039; The part of the name to use as the third sort field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display Options===&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Category.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or hide the Contact&#039;s category.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Contact List.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or hide the Contact list.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Display format.&#039;&#039;&#039; Determines the style used to display sections of the contact form.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Name.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Contact&#039;s Name.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Contact&#039;s Position.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Contact&#039;s Position.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;E-mail.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Contact&#039;s e-mail address.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Street Address.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Contact&#039;s street address.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;City or Suburb.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Contact&#039;s town or suburb.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;State or County.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Contact&#039;s state or county.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Postal Code.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Contact&#039;s postal code.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Country.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Contact&#039;s country.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Telephone.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Contact&#039;s telephone number.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Mobile phone.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Contact&#039;s mobile phone number.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Fax.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Contact&#039;s fax number.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Webpage.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Contact&#039;s web site URL.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Misc. Information.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show any miscellaneous information entered for this Contact.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Image.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Contact&#039;s image.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;vCard.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the vCard link for this Contact. Note that the &amp;quot;Enable vCard&amp;quot; option in the [[Help16:Components_Contacts_Contacts|Contact Manager - Options]] must be set to &amp;quot;Show&amp;quot; for this option to work correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show User Articles.&#039;&#039;&#039; If this contact is mapped to a user, and if this is set to Show, then a list of articles created by this user will show.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Profile.&#039;&#039;&#039; If this contact is mapped to a user, and if this is set to Show, then the profile of this user will show.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Links.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or hide the links.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Link A Label.&#039;&#039;&#039; Label for an additional link for this contact.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Link A URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; The additional link URL for this contact.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Link B Label.&#039;&#039;&#039; Label for an additional link for this contact.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Link B URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; The additional link URL for this contact.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Link C Label.&#039;&#039;&#039; Label for an additional link for this contact.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Link C URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; The additional link URL for this contact.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Link D Label.&#039;&#039;&#039; Label for an additional link for this contact.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Link D URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; The additional link URL for this contact.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Link E Label.&#039;&#039;&#039; Label for an additional link for this contact.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Link E URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; The additional link URL for this contact.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alternative Layout.&#039;&#039;&#039; Use a different layout from the supplied component view or overrides in the templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Contact form===&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Contact Form.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the E-mail form. If Show is selected, a form is displayed that allows the user to send an e-mail to the Contact from the web site. &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Send Copy to Submitter.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the checkbox: &#039;E-mail a copy of this message to your own address.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Banned Email.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter any e-mails to be banned from the site. E-mail addresses containing any of the listed text will be banned. Separate different words with semi-colons &#039;;&#039;. For example, the entry &amp;quot;spam;junk&amp;quot; would ban e-mail addresses such as &amp;quot;myspam@.com&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;aeddie@junkisgood.com&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Banned Subject.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter any e-mail subject words to be banned from the site. Separate different words with semi-colons &#039;;&#039;. For example, the entry &amp;quot;spam;junk&amp;quot; would ban e-mail subjects such as &amp;quot;This is not spam&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;I Like Junk&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Banned Text.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter any e-mail text words to be banned from the site. Separate different words with semi-colons &#039;;&#039;. For example, the entry &amp;quot;spam;junk&amp;quot; would ban e-mail content such as &amp;quot;This is not spam&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;I Like Junk&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Session Check.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check for the existence of session cookie. This means that users without cookies enabled will not be able to send emails.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Custom Reply.&#039;&#039;&#039; Turns off the automated reply, allowing for Plugins to handle integration with other systems.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Contact Redirect.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter an alternative email address, where information will be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Options===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:metadata|Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:metadata|Keywords}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:metadata|Robots}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:metadata|Rights}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-contacts-manager-edit-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Save}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|SaveAndClose}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|SaveAndNew}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Cancel}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*At least one Contact Category must be added &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; adding the first Contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To add or edit Contact Categories: [[Help16:Components_Contact_Categories|Contact Category Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To find and edit existing Contacts: [[Help16:Components_Contacts_Contacts|Contact Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Contacts_Contacts&amp;diff=66034</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Contacts Contacts</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Contacts_Contacts&amp;diff=66034"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T11:11:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen is accessed from the back-end Joomla! administrator panel. It is used to manage contacts in your Joomla! website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to access==&lt;br /&gt;
* Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Components &amp;amp;rarr; Contacts &amp;amp;rarr; Contacts&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu of the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Joomla! Administrator Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can also select the &#039;Contacts&#039; menu link from the [[Help16:Components_Contact_Categories|Category Manager: Contacts]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Contact Manager screen allows you to add contact information to your Joomla! site. You can enter information such as name, address, phone and e-mail. You can also link contacts to registered users. Afterwards, you can use the [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Manager|Menu Manager]] to create front-end links to the the contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-contacts-manager-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column&#039;s value.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Checkbox}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Linked User.&#039;&#039;&#039; The username this contact is linked to (if applicable).&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Published}} &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Featured.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not the item will be displayed in featured view. A blue circle with a white star inside means &#039;&#039;yes&#039;&#039; and a gray circle with a white dot inside means &#039;&#039;no&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Category}} See [[Help16:Components_Contact_Categories|Category Manager: Contacts]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Access}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==List Filters==&lt;br /&gt;
====Filter by Partial Title====&lt;br /&gt;
You can filter the list of items by typing in part of the Title or the ID number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Filter}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Filter by State, Category, Access and Language====&lt;br /&gt;
In the upper right area, above the column headings, there are four drop-down list boxes as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-contacts-manager-filter-attributes.png|center]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The selections may be combined. Only items matching all selections will be displayed in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Select State}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Select Category}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Select Access}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Select Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Number of Items to Display====&lt;br /&gt;
Below the list you&#039;ll find:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_list_Display_Count}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-contacts-manager-toolbar.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|New}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Edit}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Publish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Unpublish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Archive}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Checkin}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Trash}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Options}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Options==&lt;br /&gt;
Click the Options button to open the &#039;&#039;&#039;Contact Manager Options&#039;&#039;&#039; window which lets you configure this component.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-contacts-manager-options-contact.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Buttons Common to All Tabs===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:buttons|OptionsSaveClose}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:buttons|OptionsSave}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:buttons|OptionsCancel}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Contacts Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply for single Contact unless they are changed for a specific menu item or Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Choose a layout.&#039;&#039;&#039; Default layout to use for articles.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Choose Category.&#039;&#039;&#039; If &#039;Hide&#039;, the Contact Category will not show. If &#039;Show Without Link&#039;, Category will show as text. If &#039;Show With Link&#039;, Category will show as a link to a Single Category Menu Item.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Contact List.&#039;&#039;&#039; If &#039;Show&#039;, the user will be able to change which contact is shown by selecting a contact from a drop-down list of all contacts in the current contact category.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Display format.&#039;&#039;&#039; Determines the style used to display sections of the contact form.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Name.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show name of the contact.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Contact&#039;s Position.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide position.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Email.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide contact email.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Street Address.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide street address.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;City or Suburb.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or hide city or suburb.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;State or County.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide state or county.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Postal Code.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide postal or zip code.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Country.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide Country.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Telephone.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide telephone number.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Mobile phone.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide mobile number.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Fax.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide fax number.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Webpage.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or hide webpage.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Misc. Information.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide miscellaneous information.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Image.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide image.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Image.&#039;&#039;&#039; Choose the image file to use for the contact.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;vCard.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to allow export to vCard format.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show User Articles.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show User Articles::If this contact is mapped to a user, and if this is set to Show, then a list of articles created by this user will show.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Profile.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show Profile.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Links.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show Links.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Link A Label.&#039;&#039;&#039; An additional link for this contact.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Link B Label.&#039;&#039;&#039; An additional link for this contact.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Link C Label.&#039;&#039;&#039; An additional link for this contact.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Link D Label.&#039;&#039;&#039; An additional link for this contact.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Link E Label.&#039;&#039;&#039; An additional link for this contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Icons Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply for single Contact unless they are changed for a specific menu item or Contact&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Settings.&#039;&#039;&#039; Choose whether to display icons, text or nothing next to the information.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Address Icon.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the Address icon. If none selected, the default icon will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Email Icon.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the Email icon. If none selected, the default icon will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Telephone Icon.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the Telephone icon. If none selected, the default icon will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Mobile Icon.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the Mobile icon. If none selected, the default icon will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Fax Icon.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the Fax icon. If none selected, the default icon will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Misc Icon.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the Misc icon. If none selected, the default icon will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply for Contact Category Options unless they are changed for a specific menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Choose a layout.&#039;&#039;&#039; Default layout to use for articles.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Category|CatTitle}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Category|CatDesc}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Category|CatImage}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Category|SubcatLevels}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Category|EmptyCat}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Category|SubcatDesc}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;# Contacts in Category.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide the number of Contacts in category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Categories Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply for Contact Categories Options unless they are changed for a specific menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Categories|TopLevelCatDesc}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Categories|SubcatLevels}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Categories|EmptyCat}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Categories|SubcatDesc}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;# Contacts in Category.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide the number of Contacts in category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===List Layouts Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply for Contact List Options unless they are changed for a specific menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|ListLayouts|DisplaySelect}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|ListLayouts|TableHeadings}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Position.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide a Position column in the list of Contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Email.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide an Email column in the list of Contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Phone.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide a Phone column in the list of Contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Mobile.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide show a Mobile column in the list of Contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Fax.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide a Fax column in the list of Contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;City or Suburb.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide a City or Suburb column in the list of Contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;State.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide a State column in the list of Contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Country.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide a Country column in the list of Contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|ListLayouts|Pagination}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|ListLayouts|PaginationResults}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Form Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply for single Contact unless they are changed for a specific menu item or Contact.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Contact Form.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide contact form.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Send Copy to Submitter.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show checkbox to allow copy of email to be sent to submitter.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Banned Email.&#039;&#039;&#039; Email addresses not allowed to submit information with the contact form.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Banned Subject.&#039;&#039;&#039; Subjects not allowed in contact form.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Banned Text.&#039;&#039;&#039; Text not allowed in contact form body.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Session Check.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check for the existence of session cookie. This means that users without cookies enabled will not be able to send emails.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Custom Reply.&#039;&#039;&#039; Turns off the automated reply, allowing for Plugins to handle integration with other systems.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Contact Redirect.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter an alternative email address, where information will be sent to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Integration Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
These settings determine how the Contact Component will integrate with other extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Integration|ShowFeedLink}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:ComponentOptions|Integration|FeedItemShow}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Permissions Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_intro}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-components-contacts-options-permissions.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_columns_intro}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_columns_admin}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_columns_manage}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_columns_create}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_columns_delete}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_columns_edit}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_columns_edit_state}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Own.&#039;&#039;&#039; Grants users the right to edit any content they submitted in this extension.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_conclusion}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar Links==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top left, above the Filter, you will see the following two links:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-contacts-manager-links.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Contacts.&#039;&#039;&#039; This link takes you to the screen you are currently on.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Categories.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click this link to go to the [[Help16:Components_Contact_Categories|Category Manager: Contacts]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*You need to add at least one Category for your Contacts &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; you can add your first Contact. Categories are added using the [[Help16:Components_Contact_Categories|Category Manager: Contacts]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* To add or edit Contacts: [[Help16:Components_Contacts_Contacts_Edit|Contact Manager: Contact - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Contact Categories: [[Help16:Components_Contact_Categories|Category Manager: Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Users: [[Help16:Users_User_Manager|User Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Contact_Categories_Edit&amp;diff=66033</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Contact Categories Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Contact_Categories_Edit&amp;diff=66033"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T11:11:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen is accessed from the back-end Joomla! administrator panel. It is used to create or edit Contact Categories in your Joomla! website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to the [[Help16:Components_Contact_Categories|Contact Category Manager]]. To add a new Contact Category, press the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon in the toolbar. To edit an existing Contact Category, click on the Category&#039;s Name or click the Category&#039;s checkbox and then click on the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; icon in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can add a Contact Category or edit an existing Contact Category. Contact Categories allow you to organize contacts in your web site. Contact Categories are separate from other types of Categories, such as those for Articles, Banners, News Feeds, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-contacts-category-manager-edit-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Details and Options==&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can enter information about the Contact Category, such as name, alias, description, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Alias}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Parent}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|State}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Access}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Permissions_SetPermissions}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|CategoryDescription}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Publishing Options===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:PublishingOptions|CreatedBy}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Basic Options===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|AlternativeLayout}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Note}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Options===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:metadata|Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:metadata|Keywords}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:metadata|Author}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:metadata|Robots}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category Permissions===&lt;br /&gt;
This section is where you can view and edit permissions for items that are part of this Contact Category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-components-contacts-categories-permissions.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tree on the left represents the user groups that have been defined for your Joomla! site, while the right part displays permissions for the currently selected group, and lets you edit those permissions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_columns_action}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_columns_select_new_setting}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_component_options_permissions_columns_calculated_setting}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-contacts-category-manager-edit-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Save}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|SaveAndClose}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|SaveAndNew}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Cancel}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To find and edit existing Contacts: [[Help16:Components_Contacts_Contacts|Contact Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Help_screen_1.7&amp;diff=66032</id>
		<title>Category:Help screen 1.7</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Help_screen_1.7&amp;diff=66032"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T11:10:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: Created page with &amp;quot;Category:Help screens Category:Joomla! 1.7&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Help screens]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 1.7]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Contact_Categories&amp;diff=66031</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Contact Categories</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Contact_Categories&amp;diff=66031"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T11:08:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen is accessed from the back-end Joomla! administrator panel. It is used to manage contact categories in your Joomla! website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
* Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Components &amp;amp;rarr; Contacts &amp;amp;rarr; Categories&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu of the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Joomla! Administrator Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can also select the &#039;Categories&#039; menu link from the [[Help16:Components_Contacts_Contacts|Contact Manager: Contacts]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Contact Category Manager is where you can edit existing Contact Categories and create new ones. Note that Contact Categories are separate from other Categories, such as for Articles, Banners, News Feeds, and Web Links. From this screen, you can also navigate to the [[Help16:Components_Contacts_Contacts|Contact Manager: Contacts]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-contacts-categories-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column&#039;s value.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Checkbox}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Published}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Access}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==List Filters==&lt;br /&gt;
====Filter by Partial Title====&lt;br /&gt;
You can filter the list of items by typing in part of the Title or the ID number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Filter}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Filter by Max Levels. State, Access and Language====&lt;br /&gt;
In the upper right area, above the column headings, there are four drop-down list boxes as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-contacts-categories-manager-filter-attributes.png|center]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The selections may be combined. Only items matching all selections will be displayed in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Select Max Levels}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Select State}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Select Access}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Select Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Number of Items to Display====&lt;br /&gt;
Below the list you&#039;ll find:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_list_Display_Count}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Batch Processing==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:BatchProcess_Categories}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-contacts-categories-manager-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|New}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Edit}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Publish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Unpublish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Archive}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Checkin}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Trash}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Rebuild.&#039;&#039;&#039; Rebuilds the Categories tree data.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Options}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Options==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Help16:Components_Contacts_Contacts#Options|Contact Manager Options]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar Links==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top left, above the Filter, you will see the following two links:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-contacts-manager-categories-links.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Contacts.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click this link to go to the [[Help16:Components_Contacts_Contacts|Contact Manager: Contacts]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Categories.&#039;&#039;&#039; This link takes you to the screen you are currently on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Contacts: [[Help16:Components_Contacts_Contacts|Contact Manager: Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To add new Contact Categories: [[Help16:Components_Contact_Categories_Edit|Category Manager - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Banners_Clients_Edit&amp;diff=66030</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Banners Clients Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Banners_Clients_Edit&amp;diff=66030"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T11:07:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen is accessed from the back-end Joomla! administrator panel. It is used to add or edit banner clients.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to the the [[Help16:Components_Banners_Clients|Banner Client Manager]]. To add a new Banner Client, click on the &#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039; icon in the toolbar. To edit an existing Banner Client, click on the Client&#039;s Name or check the Client&#039;s checkbox and press the &#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039; icon in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you add a new Banner Client or edit an existing one. Note that you need to create at least one Banner Client before you can create a Banner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-banners-client-manager-edit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Details and Options==&lt;br /&gt;
===Details===&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Client Name.&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the client. This is the name that will display in the Name column of the Banner Client Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Contact Name.&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the banner client.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Contact E-mail.&#039;&#039;&#039; The e-mail address of the banner client.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|State}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Purchase Type.&#039;&#039;&#039; The purchase type of the banner. This is used to indicate how the banner client purchased the display time for the banner - monthly, yearly, etc...&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Track Impressions.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to track the number of times the banner is displayed to web site visitors.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Track Clicks.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to track the number of times the banner is clicked by web site visitors.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Options===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:metadata|Keywords}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Use Own Prefix.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to use the banner&#039;s prefix or that of the client. Select &#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039; if you want to use the prefix of the banner client.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keyword Prefix.&#039;&#039;&#039; When matching meta keywords, only search for meta keywords with these optional prefixes. This improves performance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar. Whether you selected to create a new client or edit an existing one will determine what toolbar buttons will be available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: New client toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-banners-client-manager-new-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: Edit client toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-banners-client-manager-edit-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Save}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|SaveAndClose}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|SaveAndNew}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|SaveAsCopy}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Cancel}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Close}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* To create or edit Banners: [[Help16:Components_Banners_Banners_Edit|Banner - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Banner Categories: [[Help16:Components_Banners_Categories|Banner Category Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To place Banners on Pages: [[Help16:Extensions_Module_Manager|Module Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Banner Manager|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help25:Menus_Menu_Item_Manager_Edit&amp;diff=66029</id>
		<title>Help25:Menus Menu Item Manager Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help25:Menus_Menu_Item_Manager_Edit&amp;diff=66029"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T11:06:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How To Access==&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;To Create a New Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select Menus &amp;amp;rarr; [name of the menu] from the drop-down menu on the back-end of your Joomla! installation. For example, if a Menu is called &amp;quot;Main Menu&amp;quot;, select Menus &amp;amp;rarr; Main Menu &amp;amp;rarr; Add New Menu Item. Or you can navigate to the [[Help25:Menus_Menu_Manager|Menu Manager]] and click on the icon in the toolbar to create a new Menu Item.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;To Edit a Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select Menus &amp;amp;rarr; [name of the menu] from the drop-down menu on the back-end of your Joomla! installation. For example, if a Menu is called &amp;quot;Main Menu&amp;quot;, select Menus &amp;amp;rarr; Main Menu. Or you can navigate to the [[Help25:Menus_Menu_Manager|Menu Manager]] and select the item(s) you wish to edit by selecting their checkboxes or clicking on the item&#039;s title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The first step to creating a new Menu Item is to select it&#039;s Type.  The Menu Item Type determines the type of page that will display when this menu choice is selected by the User.  In this screen, you will select the Menu Item Type for the Menu Item you are creating.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help25-Menu_Item_New_Type.png‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you install one or more Joomla! extensions, these extensions may add new Menu Item Types. In this case, your list will have additional types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Menu Item Types==&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Item Types are organized into sections: Contacts, Newsfeeds, Weblinks, Articles, Search, Users Manager, Wrapper and System Links. With a few exceptions, these sections are further narrowed down so that you can select:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;A list of the categories in that section. &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;A list of the items in a specific category of that section. &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;A single item within a section.  &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Article Links are the most commonly used and will display content pages on your web site. External Links are used to display links to external web sites. Separators are used to place a graphic or other separator between menu options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Articles==&lt;br /&gt;
Under the Article Section, you have the following options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Archived Article List===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show a list of Articles that have been Archived and can be searched by date. Archived articles are no longer published but are still stored on the site. Articles are Archived using the [[screen.content.15|Article Manager]] screen. Note that Articles assigned to the &amp;quot;Uncategorized&amp;quot; Section will not show on the Archived Article List layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This Menu Item Type Archived Article List allows you to set the sort order of Archived Articles, as shown in the screenshot below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_archive_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Default order is most recent first. The Order option sorts Articles by the Order column in the [[screen.content.15|Article Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Article Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show a single article on the page. Note: This layout replaces the &#039;&#039;Static Content&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Link Content&#039;&#039; used in Joomla! version 1.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Article Layout has one Parameter, the Article to include in the layout, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_article_parameters.png|frame|center]]Press the Select button to select the desired Article for this layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Article Submission Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Allows users to submit an article. This only works for users who are members of the Authors, Publishers, or Editors groups. Members of the Registered or Public groups will not be able to submit articles even if this page is visible to them. If the page is visible to a user without the correct access level, they will get an error message when trying to load the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This type has no Basic or Advanced Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category Blog Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show articles belonging to a specific Category, in a blog layout.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Blog Layout}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category Blog Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:category_blog_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Image Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Leading}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Intro}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Columns}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category Blog Layout has the following Advanced Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:front_page_parameters_advanced.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Primary Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Multi Column Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination Results}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category List Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show articles belonging to one Category, in a list layout. A list layout lists each Article&#039;s Title and allows the User to link to the Article. An example is shown below:[[Image:category_list_layout_example.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category List Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:category_list_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Number of Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Table Headings}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Date Column}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Date Format}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Filter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Filter Field}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category List Layout has the following Advanced Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Category_list_advanced_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Primary Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pagination.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show Pagination support. Pagination provides page links at the bottom of the page that allow the User to navigate to additional pages. These are needed if the Articles will not fit on one page. An example is shown below.[[Image:blog_layout_pagination.png|frame|center]]The following options are available.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;Hide:&#039;&#039; Pagination links not shown. Note: In this case, Users will not be able to navigate to additional pages.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;Show:&#039;&#039; Pagination links shown if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Display Select:&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide the Display # drop-down list box. This allows you to limit the number of Articles listed on one page.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Front Page Blog Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show all Articles that have been published to the Front Page, in a Blog Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Blog Layout}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Front Page Blog Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:front_page_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Leading}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Intro}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Columns}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category Blog Layout has the following Advanced Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Front_page_parameters_advanced.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Primary Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Multi Column Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination Results}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Section Blog Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show Articles belonging to one Section, in a Blog Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Blog Layout}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Section Blog Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:section_blog_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Image Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Leading}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Intro}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Columns}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Section Blog Layout has the following Advanced Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Front_page_parameters_advanced.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Primary Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Multi Column Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination Results}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Section Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show Articles by Category in one Section, in a list layout. This layout shows a list Categories in the Section. An example is shown below: [[Image:section_layout_example.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each Category links to a page that is similar to a Category List Layout, providing links to each Article in that Category. Note that you cannot directly set parameters to control the display of these Category List Layouts from within this screen. However, it is possible to do this using separate Menu Items for each Category. See the article [[How_to_control_Category_List_layouts_when_drilling_from_a_Section_Layout|How to control Category List layouts when drilling from a Section Layout]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Section Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:section_layout_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Description Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Image Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category List - Section}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Empty Categories in Section}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Category Items}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Section Layout has the following Advanced Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:section_layout_advanced_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Primary Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parameters - Component for Articles===&lt;br /&gt;
All Articles Layouts have the same options under Parameters - Component. For each of these components, you may select one of three options: No/Hide, Yes/Show, or Use Global. An example of this section is shown below.[[Image:Article_parameters_component.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These values work with the values set in the [[Screen.content.15|Article Manager/Parameters]] and the values set in the [[Screen.content.edit.15|Article Manager New/Edit]] to determine the action on the page. The parameters in all three places work together in a hierarchy, as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
# The value from the Parameters - Advanced section of the [[Screen.content.edit.15|Article Manager New/Edit]] is examined. If this value is set to Yes/Show or No/Hide, then that action is taken and no further checking is done.&lt;br /&gt;
# If the value above is set to &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot; then the value from the Parameters - Component section of the [[screen.menus.type.15|Menu Item Type]] (this screen) is examined. If this value is set to Yes/Show or No/Hide, then that action is taken and no further checking is done.&lt;br /&gt;
# If &#039;&#039;both&#039;&#039; of the values above are set to &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot; then the value from [[Screen.content.15|Article Manager/Parameters]] is used to determine the result.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The individual Parameters are described below.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Unauthorized Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Article Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Intro Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Name}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Author Name}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Created Date and Time}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Modified Date and Time}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Navigation}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Read more... Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Article Rating/Voting}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Icons}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|PDF Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Print Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|E-mail Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Hits Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|For each feed item show}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contacts==&lt;br /&gt;
When the Contacts link is selected, it expands to display the options shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_type_contacts.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Contact Category Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show all of the published Contacts in a given Category. Note that Contact Categories are separate from Article Categories. Contacts and Contact Categories are entered by selecting Components/Contacts. See [[screen.contactmanager.15|Contact Manager]] and [[screen.categories.15|Category Manager]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Contact Category Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:Menu_Item.Contact.Category_Layout_Params.Basic.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;# Links&#039;&#039;&#039;. Number of contacts to show.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Contact Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image Align}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Limit Box}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard Contact Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show the details of a single Contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Standard Contact Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:contact_standard_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Contact}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Drop Down}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Category in Breadcrumbs}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parameters - Component for Contacts===&lt;br /&gt;
All Contacts Layouts have the same options under Parameters - Component. An example of this section is&lt;br /&gt;
shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:contact_parameters_component1.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These settings work with the settings in the [[screen.contactmanager.15#Contacts Parameters|Contacts: Global Configuration]] and the [[screen.contactmanager.edit.15#Contact Parameters|Contact Manager - New/Edit]]. The setting in the [[screen.contactmanager.edit.15#Contact Parameters|Contact Manager - New/Edit]] takes priority. If the setting there is &#039;Use Global&#039;, then the setting here takes effect. If both of these settings are &#039;Use Global&#039;, then the setting in [[screen.contactmanager.15#Contacts Parameters|Contacts: Global Configuration]] takes effect.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Icons/Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Address Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Contact E-mail Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Telephone Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Mobile Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Fax Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Miscellaneous Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Table Headings}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Contact&#039;s Position}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show E-mail Address}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Telephone Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Mobile Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Fax Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enable vCard}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Banned E-mail}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Banned Subject}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Banned Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Session Check}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Custom Reply}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Newsfeeds==&lt;br /&gt;
When the News Feeds link is selected, it expands to display the options shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_type_news_feeds.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these is described below. Note that News Feed Categories are separate from Article Categories. News Feeds and News Feed Categories are entered by selecting Components &amp;amp;rarr; News Feeds. See [[screen.newsfeeds.15|News Feeds Manager]] and [[screen.categories.15|Category Manager]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category List Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show a list of all News Feed Categories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category List Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:news_category_list_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Limit Box}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|News Feed Description Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image Align}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show a list of News Feeds in a Category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:news_category_layout_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Limit Box}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Single Feed Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show a single News Feed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Single Feed Layout has the following Basic Parameter, as shown below. [[Image:news_single_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Feed}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parameters - Component for News Feeds===&lt;br /&gt;
All News Feed Layouts have the same options under Parameters - Component. An example of this section is shown below.[[Image:News_feed_parameters_component1.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
These settings work with the settings in the [[screen.newsfeeds.15#Global Configuration|News Feeds: Global Configuration]]. If a parameter here is set to &#039;Hide&#039; or &#039;Show&#039; then that action is taken. If a parameter here is set to &#039;Use Global&#039;, then the setting in [[screen.newsfeeds.15#Global Configuration|News Feeds: Global Configuration]] is used.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Table Headings}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Name Column}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Articles Column}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Link Column}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Category Items}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Feed Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Feed Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Item Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Word Count}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Link title]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Search==&lt;br /&gt;
When the Search link is selected, it expands to display the Search layout. This is used to show the Search form and the Search results as shown below. [[Image:search_layout_example.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Search Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.[[Image:search_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Use Search Areas.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to show the Search Areas check boxes. These check boxes allow a User to limit the search to any combination of Articles, Web Links, Contacts, Categories, Sections, and News Feeds.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Created Date.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Date and Time the Article was created when displaying the Search results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Component&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Search Layout has the following options under Parameters - Component:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:search_parameters_component1.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
These setting work with the settings in the [[screen.stats.searches.15|Search Statistics]]. If a parameter here is set to &#039;Yes&#039;, &#039;No&#039;, &#039;Show&#039;, or &#039;Hide&#039;, then that action is taken. If a parameter here is set to &#039;Use Global&#039;, then the setting in [[screen.stats.searches.15|Search Statistics]] is used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Gather Search Statistics.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to enable the gathering of Search Statistics. Yes/No/Use Global.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Created Date.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether to Hide or Show the Created Date for an Article. This parameter can be overridden at the Menu Item and Article level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Users Manager==&lt;br /&gt;
When the User link is selected, it expands to display the options shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_type_user.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default Login Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Allows a user to login to the site, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:default_login_layout.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Default Login Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.[[Image:default_login_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Login Page Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Title of this Page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Page Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; Title to display as the Page Title. If blank, the Title of the Menu Item will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Redirection URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; The URL of the Page that the User will be redirected to after a successful login. If blank, the Front Page will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login JS Message.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the JavaScript pop-up that indicates a successful login.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Description.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Login Description Text, entered below.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Description Text.&#039;&#039;&#039; Text to display on a successful login. If blank, the variable &amp;quot;LOGIN_DESCRIPTION&amp;quot; will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Image.&#039;&#039;&#039; Image for the Login Page. This must be in the &amp;quot;images/stories&amp;quot; folder.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Image Align.&#039;&#039;&#039; Align image to the left or right of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Logout Page Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Logout Page Title.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Page Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; Text to display at the top of the Page. If blank, the Menu Item Title will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Redirection URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; The URL of the Page the User will be directed to after a successful logout. If blank, the Front Page will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout JS Message.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the JavaScript pop-up that indicates a successful logout.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Description.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Logout Description Text, entered below.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Description Text.&#039;&#039;&#039; Text to display on a successful logout. If blank, the variable &amp;quot;LOGOUT_DESCRIPTION&amp;quot; will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Image.&#039;&#039;&#039; Image for the Logout Page. This must be in the &amp;quot;images/stories&amp;quot; folder.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Image Align.&#039;&#039;&#039; Align image to the left or right of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default Registration Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Allows a user to register for the site, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:default_user_registration_layout.png|frame|center]]This Layout has no unique Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default Remind Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Allows the user to receive an e-mail with their username, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:default_remind_layout.png|frame|center]] This Layout has no unique Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default Reset Layout===  &lt;br /&gt;
Allows the user to reset their password, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:default_reset_layout.png|frame|center]] This Layout has no unique Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default User Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Shows a welcome message when the User enters the registered zone. This Layout has no unique Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User Form Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Allows a User to edit their account details, choose a new password, change the language for both the Back-end and Front-end, and modify their time zone. Users with publishing permissions may choose a text editor. Users with administrator permissions may choose the Help Site they want to use in the back-end. The layout for users in the Registered and Author groups is shown below.[[Image:user_form_layout.png|frame|center]] This Layout has no unique Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Web Links==&lt;br /&gt;
When the &#039;Web Links&#039; link is selected, it expands to display the options shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_web_links.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Web Link Category List Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Shows a list of all the Web Link Categories. The User may click on a Category to see the links for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Web Link Category List Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:web_link_category_list_parameters1.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image Align}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category List Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Shows a list of all of the Web Links in a Category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category List Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:Category_list_web_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Category.&#039;&#039;&#039; Web Link Category for this Page. Select a Web Link Category from the drop-down list box. Note that these Categories are different from Article Categories and are entered from the selection Components/Web Links/Categories.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Web Link Submission Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Shows a form that allows a Registered User to submit a Web Link, as shown below. [[Image:submit_web_link.png|frame|center]] This only works for users who are members of the Authors, Publishers, or Editors group. Members of the Registered or Public groups will not be able to submit articles even if this page is visible to them. If the page is visible to a user without the correct access level, they will get an error message when trying to load the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parameters - Component for Web Links===&lt;br /&gt;
All Web Links Layouts have the same options under Parameters - Component. An example of this section is shown below.[[Image:web_link_parameters_component1.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
These settings work with the settings in the [[screen.weblink.15#Global Configuration|Web Links: Global Configuration]]. The a parameter here is set to &#039;Hide&#039; or &#039;Show&#039; then that action is taken. If a parameter here is set to &#039;Use Global&#039;, then the setting in [[screen.weblink.15#Global Configuration|Web Links: Global Configuration]] is used.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Web Links Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Web Links Introduction}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Web Links Hits}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Link Descriptions}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Other Categories}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Table Headings}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Target}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrapper==&lt;br /&gt;
When the Wrapper link is selected, it expands to display the Wrapper layout. This is used to show an external web site inside a page in your web site, using an HTML [[:Wikipedia:IFrame|IFrame]]. The external web site is contained inside the Wrapper. You can navigate to different pages in the wrapped web site, all inside the page of your web site. The example below shows the Joomla! web site inside a Wrapper. [[Image:menu_item_type_wrapper.jpg|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Wrapper Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:wrapper_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Wrapper URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; URL for the web site to open inside the Wrapper IFrame.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Scroll Bars.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to include horizontal and vertical scroll bars. Auto will add the scroll bars automatically when needed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Width.&#039;&#039;&#039; Width of the IFrame Window. You can enter in a number of pixels or enter in a percentage by including a &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; at the end of the number. For example, &amp;quot;550&amp;quot; means 550 pixels. &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot; means 75% of the page width.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Height.&#039;&#039;&#039; Height of the IFrame window, either in pixels or percent (by adding &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; to the number).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==System Links==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===External Link===&lt;br /&gt;
This Menu Item Type is used to create a menu choice that links to an external web site or page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The External Link has one Basic Parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Menu Item Alias===&lt;br /&gt;
This Menu Item Type creates a Link to an existing Menu Item. It allows you to have identical Menu Items on two or more different Menus without duplicating the settings. So, for example, if you change a parameter of a Menu Item that has an Alias linked to it, the Alias will automatically acquire the same change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Alias has one Basic Parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Menu Item that this Alias links to. Select the Menu Item from the drop-down list box.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Italic text&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Text Separator===&lt;br /&gt;
This Menu Item type creates a Menu Placeholder or a Separator within a Menu. These can be used to break up a long Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Separator has one Basic Parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Menu Item Details and Parameters - System==&lt;br /&gt;
When any of the Menu Item Types listed above are selected, a details screen similar to the one below displays.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:category_blog_layout1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;Menu Item Details&#039; and the &#039;Parameters - System&#039; parts are the same for each Menu Item. These are documented below. The &#039;Parameters - Component&#039; part is different for each Internal Link group -- Articles, Contacts, News Feeds, Polls, Search, User, Web Links, and Wrapper. Therefore, these are documented in each group&#039;s section above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Parameters - Basic section is different for each Menu Type. Also, some Menu Types contain a Parameters - Advanced section, which is also different for each Menu Type. These are documented for each individual Menu Type above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Alias}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Display in}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Parent Item}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Published}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Order (Details)}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Access Level}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|On Click, Open in}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - System&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section, shown below, allows setting additional parameters. [[Image:menu_item_parameters_system.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
These are described below.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Page Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Page Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Page Class Suffix}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|SSL Enabled}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*Parameters for Articles and Contacts can be set at 3 different levels:&lt;br /&gt;
*# the individual Article or Contact New or Edit screen (Article:[Edit] or Contact:[Edit]).&lt;br /&gt;
*# the Menu Item that displays the Article or Contact (this screen).&lt;br /&gt;
*# the Global Configuration screen, accessed using the Parameters button on the Article Manager and Contact Manager screens.&lt;br /&gt;
: The parameter set for the individual Article or Contact always takes first priority. If the individual parameter is set to &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot;, then the parameter set in the Menu Item takes priority. If both of these are set to &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot;, then the parameter in the Global Configuration takes priority.&lt;br /&gt;
*Parameters for News Feeds, Search, and Web Links work in a similar way, except that they are only set in this screen and in the Global Configuration screens. No parameters are set for individual items of these types. As with Articles and Contacts, the Menu Item setting takes priority over the Global Configuration setting.&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the Global Configuration parameters whenever possible. This way, if you want to change a parameter setting for all content items, you can just change it once in the Global Configuration and it will automatically be reflected in all affected content items.&lt;br /&gt;
*Often on the Front Page component, Joomla! users do not want their Articles to display in 2 columns, which is the default value. The first Article displays in one column (using the full width), but subsequent Articles display in 2 columns. This can be adjusted by changing the values of the Parameters - Basic for the Front Page.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you are trying to manually change the order of articles on the Front Page or in a Blog or List Layout, make sure that you have the Primary Order and Category Order parameters set correctly in the Parameters - Advanced Section. If these parameters are set incorrectly, changing the order manually will have no effect on the order on the web page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help25-Toolbar-Save-SaveClose-SaveNew-Cancel-Help.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are:&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk25:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Save|menu item}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk25:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndClose|menu item}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk25:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndNew|menu item}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk25:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Cancel}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk25:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* To add or edit Articles: [[Screen.content.edit.15|Article Manager - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Banners: [[Screen.banners.15|Banner Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Categories: [[Screen.categories.15|Category Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Contacts: [[Screen.contactmanager.15|Contact Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To add or edit Menus: [[Screen.menumanager.new.15|Menu Manager New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To create a &#039;main_menu&#039; Module to Add a Menu to One or More Pages: [[screen.modules.15|Module Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with News Feeds: [[Screen.newsfeeds.15|News Feeds Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Polls: [[Screen.polls.15|Polls Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|2.5|Menu Item Manager|Menus}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Banners_Clients&amp;diff=66028</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Banners Clients</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Banners_Clients&amp;diff=66028"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T11:04:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen is accessed from the back-end Joomla! administrator panel. It is used to add or edit banner clients.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
* Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Components &amp;amp;rarr; Banners &amp;amp;rarr; Clients&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu of the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Joomla! Administrator Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can also select the &#039;Clients&#039; menu link from the [[Help16:Components_Banners_Categories|Banner Categories Manager]], [[Help16:Components_Banners_Banners|Banner Manager]] or the [[Help16:Components_Banners_Tracks|Banner Tracks Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Banner Client Manager is where you can edit existing Banner Clients or create new ones. Note that you must have at least one Banner Client and one Banner Category defined before you can add your first Banner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-banners-clients-screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column&#039;s value.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Checkbox}} &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Client.&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the Banner Client. You may click on the name to open the Client for editing.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Contact.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Contact for this Client.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Published}} &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Active.&#039;&#039;&#039; The number of Banners defined for this Client.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords.&#039;&#039;&#039; Meta keywords to be used for this client&#039;s banners.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Purchase Type.&#039;&#039;&#039; The banner purchase type of the client. This is used to indicate how the client purchased the display time for their banners - monthly, yearly, etc...&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==List Filters==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Partial Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can filter the list of items by typing part of the client&#039;s name.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-banners-clients-filter-name.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Published State&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the upper right area, above the column headings, there is one drop-down box as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-banners-clients-filter-attributes.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only items matching the selected state will display in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:listfiltering|Select State}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-banners-clients-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|New}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Edit}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Publish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Unpublish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Archive}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Checkin}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Trash}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Options}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Options==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Help16:Components_Banners_Banners#Options|Banner Manager Options]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar Links==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top left, above the Filter, you will see the following four links:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16-banners-clients-links.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Banners.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click this link to go to the [[Help16:Components_Banners_Banners|Banners Manager]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Categories.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click this link to go to the [[Help16:Components_Banners_Categories|Banner Category Manager]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Clients.&#039;&#039;&#039; This link is disabled, since you are already in the Clients page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Tracks.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click this link to go to the [[Help16:Components_Banners_Tracks|Banner Tracks Manager]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* To create or edit Banners: [[Help16:Components_Banners_Banners_Edit|Banner - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Banner Categories: [[Help16:Components_Banners_Categories|Banner Category Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Banner Manager|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Banners_Banners_Edit&amp;diff=66027</id>
		<title>Help17:Components Banners Banners Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Components_Banners_Banners_Edit&amp;diff=66027"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T11:04:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen is accessed from the back-end Joomla! administrator panel. It is used to add or edit banners which can be displayed on your Joomla! website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to the [[Help16:Components_Banners_Banners|Banner Manager]]. To add a new Banner, click on the &#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039; icon in the toolbar. To edit an existing Banner, click on the Banner&#039;s Name or check the Banner&#039;s checkbox and press the &#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039; icon in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you add a new Banner or edit an existing one. Note that you will need to create at least one [[Help16:Components_Banners_Clients|Banner Client]] and one [[Help16:Components_Banners_Categories|Banner Category]] before you can create your first Banner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-banners-manager-edit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Details and Options==&lt;br /&gt;
===Details===&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Name.&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the Banner. This is the name that will display in the &#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039; column of the [[Help16:Components_Banners_Banners|Banner Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Alias}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Category}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Type.&#039;&#039;&#039; The type of banner to display. Options are an image file or custom HTML code.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|State}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Custom Code (Only displayed for banner type &#039;&#039;Custom&#039;&#039;)&#039;&#039;&#039;. The HTML code to insert in the place of a banner image file.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Image (Only displayed for banner type &#039;&#039;Image&#039;&#039;).&#039;&#039;&#039; Image file to display for the banner. Specify the relative path to the banner image to use or click the &#039;&#039;Select&#039;&#039; button to browse and select the image file to use. Use the [[Help16:Content_Media_Manager|Media Manager]] to upload Banner image files to your site.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Width (Only displayed for banner type &#039;&#039;Image&#039;&#039;).&#039;&#039;&#039; The fixed width to resize the banner image to. Leave this blank if you want to use the actual width of the banner image file.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Height (Only displayed for banner type &#039;&#039;Image&#039;&#039;).&#039;&#039;&#039; The fixed height to resize the banner image to. Leave this blank if you want to use the actual height of the banner image file.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alternative Text (Only displayed for banner type &#039;&#039;Image&#039;&#039;).&#039;&#039;&#039; Text to display in place of the banner image in the event the image cannot be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Click URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; The URL to navigate to when the User clicks on the Banner.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|CategoryDescription}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Publishing Options===&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Created.&#039;&#039;&#039; The date the banner was created.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:PublishingOptions|PublishStart}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:PublishingOptions|PublishFinish}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Sticky.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not the banner is &#039;sticky&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Max. Impressions.&#039;&#039;&#039; The number of Impressions purchased for this Banner. Impressions are the number of times a Banner will be displayed on a page. Check the &#039;Unlimited&#039; checkbox if an unlimited number of Impressions is allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Total Impressions.&#039;&#039;&#039; The number of times this Banner has been displayed on a web page to a user. No entry is allowed. You can reset this number to 0 by pressing the &#039;Reset impressions&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Total Clicks.&#039;&#039;&#039; The number of times this Banner has been clicked. No entry is allowed. You can reset this number to 0 by pressing the &#039;Reset clicks&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Client.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Client Name for this Banner. Select one from the drop-down list box of existing Clients.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Purchase Type.&#039;&#039;&#039; The purchase type of the banner. This is used to indicate how the banner client purchased the display time for the banner - monthly, yearly, etc...&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Track Impressions.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to track the number of times the banner is displayed to web site visitors.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Track Clicks.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to track the number of times the banner is clicked by web site visitors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Options===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:metadata|Keywords}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Use Own Prefix.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to use the banner&#039;s prefix or that of the client. Select &#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039; if you want to use the prefix of the banner client.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keyword Prefix.&#039;&#039;&#039; When matching meta keywords, only search for meta keywords with these optional prefixes. This improves performance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar. Whether you selected to create a new banner or edit an existing one will determine what toolbar buttons will be available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: New banner toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-banners-manager-new-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: Edit banner toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-banners-manager-edit-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Save}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|SaveAndClose}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|SaveAndNew}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|SaveAsCopy}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Cancel}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Close}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* Banners are placed on specific pages by adding Modules of type &#039;Banners&#039; using the [[Help16:Extensions_Module_Manager|Module Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
* If you have a series of Banners that you would like to display on one or more pages in random order:&lt;br /&gt;
*# Create the Banners you wish to include, making sure they have the same Client and Category.&lt;br /&gt;
*# Create a Banner Module for this Client and Category, and in the Menu Assignment pick the Menu Selections for the module to display on. &lt;br /&gt;
*# In the Banner Module, set the &#039;Randomise&#039; value to &#039;Sticky, Randomise&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
: With these settings, the different Banners for that Client and Category will display on the selected pages in random order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Banner Clients: [[Help16:Components_Banners_Clients|Banner Client Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Banner Categories: [[Help16:Components_Banners_Categories|Banner Category Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To place Banners on Pages: [[Help16:Extensions_Module_Manager|Module Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Banner Manager|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Help_screen_1.6&amp;diff=66026</id>
		<title>Category:Help screen 1.6</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Help_screen_1.6&amp;diff=66026"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T11:03:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Help screens for the Joomla! 1.6.x series.  The Documentation Team maintains a [[Help16:Help_screens|control page]] for these help screens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Help screens]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 1.6]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Getting_Started_with_Joomla!_1.6&amp;diff=66025</id>
		<title>Category:Getting Started with Joomla! 1.6</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Getting_Started_with_Joomla!_1.6&amp;diff=66025"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T10:58:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Getting Started]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 1.6]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Getting_Started_with_Joomla!_1.6&amp;diff=66024</id>
		<title>Category:Getting Started with Joomla! 1.6</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Getting_Started_with_Joomla!_1.6&amp;diff=66024"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T10:58:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Getting Started]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 1.5]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=User:Wgviana&amp;diff=66023</id>
		<title>User:Wgviana</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=User:Wgviana&amp;diff=66023"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T10:55:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RightTOC}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= SubPages =&lt;br /&gt;
{{#subpages:}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Advanced Wikipedia =&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://pt.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ajuda:Fun%C3%A7%C3%B5es_sint%C3%A1ticas Parse Function]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://pt.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ajuda:Palavras_m%C3%A1gicas Magic Words]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://pt.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikip%C3%A9dia:Rob%C3%B4s Robots]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://pt.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ajuda:Guia_de_edi%C3%A7%C3%A3o/Dicas_e_truques Dicas]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Featured Activities =&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Creating_a_bot Creating a bot]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://semeb.com/dpldemo/index.php?title=DPL:Manual_-_DPL_parameters:_Criteria_for_page_selection Creating Dynamics Pages]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Statistc =&lt;br /&gt;
* User Actives ({{NUMBEROFACTIVEUSERS:R}})&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Extension Mediawiki =&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:Wgraph| Extension:Wgraph]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:Semantic_Project_Management| Extension:Semantic Project Management]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
|category=Joomla!_1.5&lt;br /&gt;
|resultsheader = ====Category Joomla!_1.5:====\n&lt;br /&gt;
|addpagecounter=true&lt;br /&gt;
|format=,\n %COUNT% [[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]],&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Joomla! 1.0&lt;br /&gt;
|Joomla! 1.5&lt;br /&gt;
|Joomla! 1.6&lt;br /&gt;
|Joomla! 1.7&lt;br /&gt;
|Joomla! 2.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;categorytree&amp;gt;Joomla! 1.0&amp;lt;/categorytree&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;categorytree&amp;gt;Joomla! 1.5&amp;lt;/categorytree&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;categorytree&amp;gt;Joomla! 1.6&amp;lt;/categorytree&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;categorytree&amp;gt;Joomla! 1.7&amp;lt;/categorytree&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;categorytree&amp;gt;Joomla! 2.5&amp;lt;/categorytree&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Template_Development&amp;diff=66022</id>
		<title>Category:Template Development</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Template_Development&amp;diff=66022"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T10:44:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Pages about developing templates.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk:Template}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Extension development]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Templates]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Plugin_Development&amp;diff=66021</id>
		<title>Category:Plugin Development</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Plugin_Development&amp;diff=66021"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T10:41:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Pages about developing plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk:Plugin}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Extension development]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Plugins]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Module_Development&amp;diff=66020</id>
		<title>Category:Module Development</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Module_Development&amp;diff=66020"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T10:40:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Pages about developing modules.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk:Module}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Extension development]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Modules]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Language_Development&amp;diff=66019</id>
		<title>Category:Language Development</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Language_Development&amp;diff=66019"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T10:39:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Pages about developing languages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Extension development]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Languages]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Component_Development&amp;diff=66018</id>
		<title>Category:Component Development</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Component_Development&amp;diff=66018"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T10:38:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Pages about developing components.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk:Component}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Extension Development]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Components]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Language_Manager_Installed&amp;diff=66017</id>
		<title>Help17:Extensions Language Manager Installed</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help17:Extensions_Language_Manager_Installed&amp;diff=66017"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T10:33:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions &amp;amp;rarr; Language Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu on the back-end of your Joomla! installation &#039;&#039;&#039;or&#039;&#039;&#039; click the icon &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; in the control center.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
In the Language Manager you can set the default Language for both the Front-end and Back-end of your Joomla! web site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-Extenions-Language-Manager-Installed.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;Installed&#039;&#039; tab has the following column titles. These details are fetched from the XML file included in the language pack.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Num.&#039;&#039;&#039; An indexing number automatically assigned by Joomla! for ease of reference. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Checkbox}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Default.&#039;&#039;&#039; The default language of the site, marked with a yellow graphical asterisk in this column. &#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;: to every user a language can be assigned (see &amp;quot;User Management&amp;quot;), user from groups &amp;quot;Administrator&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Super Administrator&amp;quot; can select their preferred language themself at login.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version.&#039;&#039;&#039; The version number of the installed language.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Date.&#039;&#039;&#039; The creation date of the language.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Author.&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the language translator is displayed in this column.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Author E-mail.&#039;&#039;&#039; The e-mail address of the translator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help17-Extenions-Language-Manager-Installed-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Default.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the Language that you want to be the default Language. Then click this button. The default star symbol will show in the Default column, indicating that this is now the default Language.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Options.&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens the Language Manager Options window. Allows setting of default permissions used for all content in this component.&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installed and Content Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top left, above the columns, you will see two links as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help17-Extenions-Language-Installed-Content-tabs.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Installed.&#039;&#039;&#039; Shows the Languages available for the Front-end of the web site or administrator area, depending on the filter location at left that is current.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Content.&#039;&#039;&#039; Shows the Content Languages available for the web site. See [[Help17:Extensions_Language_Manager_Content | Extensions Language Manager Content]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*Users can use any Language from the list of installed Languages, either by having it assigned in the [[Help17:Users_User_Manager|User Manager]] or by filling out a [[Help17:Menus_Menu_Item_Manager_Edit#User_Form_Layout|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit - User Form Layout]] at the Front end. This will cause the Joomla! system prompts to be generated in this Language just for this User. For example, if a User chooses Spanish as their language, then the Search Module will show with prompts in Spanish.&lt;br /&gt;
*This User&#039;s choice is not affected by the Default Language set for the Front-end.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Changing a User&#039;s Language or the Default Language does not affect the web site&#039;s Articles and other content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039;: Do not delete the default language files (for example, with FTP). This will create errors on both the Front-end and Back-end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Additional Languages can be added using the [[Help17:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Install|Extension Manager - Install Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If desired, you can show the Front-end site in one Language and show the Back-end administration pages in a different Language. Also, individual articles can be configured to use a different language in the Advanced Parameter pane when editing the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To install more Languages: [[Help17:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Install|Extension Manager - Install Screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To uninstall a Language: [[Help17:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Manage|Extension Manager - Manage]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To change the Language for a User: [[Help17:Users_User_Manager_Edit|User Manager - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To set the Language of an Article: [[Help17:Content_Article_Manager_Edit#Parameters_-_Advanced|Article Manager - New/Edit - Parameters - Advanced&lt;br /&gt;
]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.7|Language Management|Documentation Working Group}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help16:Extensions_Module_Manager_Language_Switcher&amp;diff=66016</id>
		<title>Help16:Extensions Module Manager Language Switcher</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help16:Extensions_Module_Manager_Language_Switcher&amp;diff=66016"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T10:31:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to access==&lt;br /&gt;
You can access the Language Switcher module by either opening an existing  module in the Module Manager or by creating a new Language Switcher Module.&lt;br /&gt;
You can access the Module Manager by going to &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions &amp;gt; Module Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Description ==&lt;br /&gt;
This module allows you to switch between available Content languages.  Selecting a language will take you to the home page for that language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Screenshot ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16_module_languageswitch.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Basic Options===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help16_mod_languageswitcher_basic.JPG|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pre-text:&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter the text that appears before the Language Switcher&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Post-text:&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter the text that appears below the Language Switcher.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Use image flags:&#039;&#039;&#039; Use visual indicators for each language, in the shape of a flag.&lt;br /&gt;
===Advanced Options===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J16_mod_advanced_4.JPG|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alternative layout&#039;&#039;&#039; Apply an alternative layout or template override&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Module Class Suffix&#039;&#039;&#039; Apply a CSS suffix to the module&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Caching}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Cache Time}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick tips==&lt;br /&gt;
No tips have been added at this time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.6|Module Management|Discover}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Language_Management&amp;diff=66015</id>
		<title>Category:Language Management</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Language_Management&amp;diff=66015"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T10:28:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Languages]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Management]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Language_Management&amp;diff=66014</id>
		<title>Category:Language Management</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Language_Management&amp;diff=66014"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T10:28:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Language|Management]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help16:Extensions_Language_Manager_Edit&amp;diff=66013</id>
		<title>Help16:Extensions Language Manager Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help16:Extensions_Language_Manager_Edit&amp;diff=66013"/>
		<updated>2012-04-06T10:27:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wgviana: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions &amp;amp;rarr; Language Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu on the back-end of your Joomla! installation &#039;&#039;&#039;or&#039;&#039;&#039; click the icon &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; in the control center. Under the content tab click on the language to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
In the Language Manager: Edit Content Language you can set the title, SEF, image, code, and description of the installed langauges. You may also update or add meta keywords and description.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-Extenions-Language-Manager-Edit-Content-Language.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Details==&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the language as it will appear ion the lists.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Title Native.&#039;&#039;&#039; Lenguag title IN the native language.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;SEF.&#039;&#039;&#039; SEF for this language. If &#039;en&#039; is used then it will be added after the site URL. Example: http://mysite.com/en. Note: The prefix must be unique over all the languages.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Image.&#039;&#039;&#039; Name of the image file for this language when using the &amp;quot;Use Image Flags&amp;quot; Language Switcher basic option. Example: If &#039;en&#039; is chosen, then the image shall be en.gif. Images and CSS for this module are in media/mod_languages/&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Code.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter here the language tag - example: en-GB for English (UK). This should be the exact prefix used for the language installed or to be installed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Published.&#039;&#039;&#039; Available options are published, unpublished, disabled, trash&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Description.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter a discription for the language&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help16-Extenions-Language-Manager-Edit-Content-Language-toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndClose}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Save}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndNew}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Close}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Chunk16:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site and Administrator Links==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top left, above the columns, you will see two links as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Template_manager_links.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Site.&#039;&#039;&#039; Shows the Languages available for the Front-end of the web site.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Administrator.&#039;&#039;&#039; Shows the Languages available for the Back-end of the web site. Note that the languages for the Front and Back end can be different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*Users can use any Language from the list of installed Languages, either by having it assigned in the [[Help16:Users_User_Manager|User Manager]] or by filling out a [[Help16:Menus_Menu_Item_Manager_Edit#User_Form_Layout|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit - User Form Layout]] at the Front end. This will cause the Joomla! system prompts to be generated in this Language just for this User. For example, if a User chooses Spanish as their language, then the Search Module will show with prompts in Spanish.&lt;br /&gt;
*This User&#039;s choice is not affected by the Default Language set for the Front-end.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Changing a User&#039;s Language or the Default Language does not affect the web site&#039;s Articles and other content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039;: Do not delete the default language files (for example, with FTP). This will create errors on both the Front-end and Back-end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Additional Languages can be added using the [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Install|Extension Manager - Install Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If desired, you can show the Front-end site in one Language and show the Back-end administration pages in a different Language. Also, individual articles can be configured to use a different language in the Advanced Parameter pane when editing the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To install more Languages: [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Install|Extension Manager - Install Screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To uninstall a Language: [[Help16:Extensions_Extension_Manager_Manage|Extension Manager - Manage]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To change the Language for a User: [[Help16:Users_User_Manager_Edit|User Manager - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To set the Language of an Article: [[Help16:Content_Article_Manager_Edit#Parameters_-_Advanced|Article Manager - New/Edit - Parameters - Advanced&lt;br /&gt;
]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.6|Language Management|Documentation Working Group}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wgviana</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>